Wrangler OPERATING INFORMATION

Table of Contents

1 INTRODUCTION ...... 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ...... 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ...... 61

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 173

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...... 211

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ...... 287

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...... 301

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ...... 337

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ...... 365

10 INDEX ...... 389

1 2 1

INTRODUCTION

• INTRODUCTION ...... 4 • ROLLOVER WARNING...... 4 • IMPORTANT NOTICE ...... 5 • HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...... 6 • WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...... 8 • VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ...... 8 • VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ...... 8

3 INTRODUCTION or working the vehicle, don’t overload it or by an authorized dealer or distributor who has Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler expect it to overcome the forces of nature. the qualified personnel, special tools and equip- Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it repre- Always observe local laws wherever you drive. ment to perform all service. sents precision workmanship, distinctive styl- As with other vehicles of this type, failure to The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally ing, and high quality - all essentials that are operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss interested in your complete satisfaction with this traditional to our vehicles. of control or a collision. Be sure to read the vehicle. If you encounter a service or warranty This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go “On-Road/ Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting problem which is not resolved to your satisfac- places and perform tasks that conventional And Operating” for further information. tion, discuss the matter with your authorized passenger are not intended. It handles and NOTE: dealer or distributor’s management. maneuvers differently from many passenger After reviewing the owner information, it Your authorized dealer or distributor will be cars both on-road and off-road, so take time to should be stored in the vehicle for conve- happy to assist you with any questions about become familiar with your vehicle. nient referencing and remain with the ve- your vehicle. The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was hicle when sold. designed for on-road use only. It is not intended Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may ROLLOVER WARNING for off-road driving or use in other severe con- result in loss of control or a collision. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll- ditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. over rate than other types of vehicles. This Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the while intoxicated may result in loss of control, Owner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Be higher center of gravity than many passenger collision with other vehicles or objects, going off cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, the road, or overturning; any of which may lead variety of off-road applications. Driven in an particularly those used for braking, steering, to serious injury or death. Also, failure to use unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of con- and transmission and transfer case shifting. belts subjects the driver and passengers to trol. Because of the higher center of gravity and Learn how your vehicle handles on different a greater risk of injury or death. road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may with experience, but as in driving any vehicle, To keep your vehicle running at its best, have not. take it easy as you begin. When driving off-road your vehicle serviced at recommended intervals 4 Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, IMPORTANT NOTICE ucts without imposing any obligations upon or other unsafe driving actions that can cause ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI- itself to install them on products previously loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFOR- manufactured. vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover MATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICA- The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive TION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVED the features that are standard or available as carefully. TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME. extra cost options. Therefore, some of the This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with equipment and accessories in this publication the assistance of service and engineering spe- may not appear on your vehicle. cialists to acquaint you with the operation and NOTE: maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supple- Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual first mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and before driving your vehicle and before at- various customer-oriented documents. You are taching or installing parts/accessories or urged to read these publications carefully. Fol- making other modifications to the vehicle. lowing the instructions and recommendations in this Owner’s Manual will help assure safe and In view of the many replacement parts and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. accessories from various manufacturers avail- Rollover Warning Label After you have read the Owner’s Manual, it able on the market, the manufacturer cannot be should be stored in the vehicle for convenient certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will Failure to use the driver and passenger seat not be impaired by the attachment or installation belts provided is a major cause of severe or reference and remain with the vehicle when sold. of such parts. Even if such parts are officially- fatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted approved (for example, by a general operating person is significantly more likely to die than a The manufacturer reserves the right to make permit for the part or by constructing the part in person wearing a . Always buckle up. changes in design and specifications, and/or to an officially approved design), or if an individual make additions to or improvements in its prod- operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving 5 safety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore, warranties cover the costs of repairing damage HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL neither experts nor official agencies are liable. or conditions caused by any changes to your Consult the Table of Contents to determine The manufacturer only assumes responsibility vehicle that do not comply with the manufactur- which section contains the information you de- when parts, which are expressly authorized or ers specifications. sire. recommended by the manufacturer, are at- Original Mopar® parts and accessories and tached or installed at an authorized dealer. The Since the specification of your vehicle depends other products approved by the manufacturer, same applies when modifications to the original on the items of equipment ordered, certain including qualified advice, are available at your condition are subsequently made on the manu- descriptions and illustrations may differ from authorized dealer. facturer’s vehicles. your vehicle’s equipment. When it comes to service, remember that your Your warranties do not cover any part that the The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has manufacturer did not supply. Nor do they cover Manual contains a complete listing of all sub- the factory-trained technicians and genuine the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might jects. Mopar® parts, and is interested in your satis- be caused or needed because of the installation faction. Consult the following table for a description of or use of non-manufacturer parts, components, the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do your Copyright © 2013 Chrysler International. throughout this Owner’s Manual:

6 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS the Automobile Information Disclosure Label VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this ALTERATIONS against operating procedures that could result label for a convenient record of your vehicle in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains identification number and optional equipment. CAUTIONS against procedures that could re- WARNING! sult in damage to your vehicle. If you do not Any modifications or alterations to this ve- read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss hicle could seriously affect its roadworthi- important information. Observe all Warnings ness and safety and may lead to a collision and Cautions. resulting in serious injury or death. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle Vehicle Identification Number through the windshield. This number also ap- NOTE: pears underbody, on the right side of the frame rail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.

8 2

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...... 12 • Ignition Key Removal ...... 12 • Key-In-Ignition Reminder ...... 13 • LOCK — IF EQUIPPED ...... 13 • To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ...... 13 • To Release The Steering Wheel Lock ...... 13 • Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System ...... 13 • SENTRY KEY® ...... 13 • Replacement Keys ...... 14 • Customer Key Programming ...... 14 • General Information ...... 14 • VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 15 • Rearming Of The System ...... 15 • To Arm The System ...... 15 • To Disarm The System ...... 15 • ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED ...... 16 • REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 16 • To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate ...... 16 9 • Remote Key Unlock On First Press ...... 16 • To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate...... 17 • To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock ...... 17 • Transmitter Battery Replacement ...... 18 • General Information ...... 18 • DOORS ...... 18 • Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped...... 19 • Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped ...... 19 • Front Door Removal ...... 19 • Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ...... 20 • DOOR LOCKS ...... 22 • Manual Door Locks ...... 22 • — If Equipped ...... 22 • Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors ...... 24 • WINDOWS ...... 24 • Power Windows — If Equipped ...... 24 • Wind Buffeting ...... 26 • REAR SWING GATE ...... 26 • OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ...... 26 • Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 28 • Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout (Four-Door Models Only) ...... 31 • Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure ...... 32 • Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ...... 32 • Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ...... 33 • Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped ...... 33 • Energy Management Feature ...... 34 10 • Seat Belt Pretensioners ...... 34 • Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) .....34 • Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ...... 35 • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags ...... 35 • Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ...... 38 • Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 41 • Child Restraints ...... 42 • ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 56 • Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine — If Equipped ....56 • SAFETY TIPS ...... 57 • Transporting Passengers ...... 57 • Exhaust Gas ...... 57 • Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle ...... 58 • Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . .59

11 3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS WARNING! the key to the LOCK position. The authorized dealer that sold you your new • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the vehicle has the key code numbers for your 4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock parking , shift the transmission into vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to cylinder. order duplicate keys. Ask your authorized PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the dealer for these numbers and keep them in a ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always safe place. lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- tended is dangerous for a number of rea- sons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the , Ignition Switch Positions brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the 1 — LOCK 3 — ON/RUN vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- 2 — ACC (ACCES- 4—START Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter SORY) dren. A child could operate power win- dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Ignition Key Removal • Do not leave children or animals inside 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior with an automatic transmission). heat build-up may cause serious injury or 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Acces- death. sory) position.

12 CAUTION! To Manually Lock The Steering SENTRY KEY® Wheel An unlocked is an invitation to thieves. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents With the engine running, rotate the steering unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the Always remove key from the ignition and lock wheel one–half revolution from the straight engine. The system does not need to be armed all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- ahead position, turn off the engine, and remove or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless tended. the key. Rotate the steering wheel slightly in of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. both directions until the lock engages. The system uses ignition keys which have an Key-In-Ignition Reminder To Release The Steering Wheel Lock embedded electronic chip (transponder) to pre- Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the Insert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheel vent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, ignition sounds a signal to remind you to re- slightly to the left or right, to disengage the lock. only keys that are programmed to the vehicle move the key. can be used to start and operate the vehicle. NOTE: The system will shut the engine off in two NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the engine. when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK the right to disengage it. If you turned the or ACC position. wheel to the left to engage the lock, turn the NOTE: wheel slightly to the left to disengage it. A key which has not been programmed is STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF also considered an invalid key, even if it is EQUIPPED Automatic Transmission Ignition cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for Interlock System that vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive This system prevents the key from being re- steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering During normal operation, after turning on the moved unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steer- ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is ing wheel is moved approximately a half turn in turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the in the ON/RUN position, and the brake pedal is either direction, and the key is not in the ignition, light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates depressed. the steering wheel will lock. that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb 13 check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Replacement Keys NOTE: key to start the engine. Either of these condi- NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer tions will result in the engine being shut off after system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with Only keys that have been programmed to two seconds. you to the authorized dealer. the vehicle electronics can be used to start If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key® has been normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for Customer Key Programming programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro- See your authorized dealer if you require re- longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there grammed to any other vehicle. placement or additional keys for your vehicle. is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible General Information by an authorized dealer. CAUTION! Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle The Sentry Key® operates on a carrier fre- quency of 433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key® Im- and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle CAUTION! mobilizer system will be used in the following unattended. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not European countries, which apply Directive 1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, compatible with some aftermarket remote At the time of purchase, the original owner is Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, starting systems. Use of these systems may provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Nether- result in vehicle starting problems and loss of Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure loca- lands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, tion. This number is required for authorized security protection. Russian Federation, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys Switzerland, Slovenia, Croatia, and United consists of programming a blank key to the All of the keys provided with your new vehicle Kingdom. have been programmed to the vehicle electron- vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which Operation is subject to the following conditions: ics. has never been programmed. See your autho- rized dealer if you require replacement or addi- • This device may not cause harmful interfer- tional keys for your vehicle. ence.

14 • This device must accept any interference To Arm The System To Disarm The System that may be received, including interference 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE that may cause undesired operation. exit the vehicle. transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key® into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — 2. Lock the doors and swing gate by pressing ON/RUN position. the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK IF EQUIPPED button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle transmitter. • Unlocking the doors with the manual door doors, hood, swing gate, and ignition for unau- lock plungers or the driver’s door lock thorized operation. NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Secu- If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle you lock the doors with the manual door rity Alarm. Security Alarm will sound the horn intermittently, lock plungers or the driver’s door lock cyl- • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is the headlights will turn on, flash the turn signal inder. armed, the interior power door lock lights, and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the switches will not unlock the doors. cluster. 3. Close all the doors. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro- Rearming Of The System cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to tect your vehicle; however, you can create If something triggers the alarm, and no action is signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm During this period, opening any door or the give you a false alarm. If the previously de- will turn off the horn after 29 seconds, and turn swing gate will cancel the arming process. If the scribed arming sequence has occurred, the off all of the visual signals after an additional 31 Vehicle Security Alarm is successfully set, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of seconds, then the Vehicle Security Alarm will Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate whether you are inside or outside the vehicle. If rearm itself. to indicate the alarm is armed. you remain inside the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

15 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate EQUIPPED (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED Press and release the RKE transmitter UN- LOCK button once to unlock the driver’s door The courtesy lights will turn on when you use This system allows you to lock or unlock the only, or twice to unlock all the doors and swing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to doors and swing gate from distances approxi- gate. When the RKE transmitter UNLOCK but- unlock the doors or open any door. mately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote ton is pressed, the Illuminated Entry will initiate This feature also turns on the approach lighting Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE and the turn signal lights will flash twice. in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to transmitter does not need to be pointed at the “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of vehicle to activate the system. Remote Key Unlock On First Press Your Vehicle” for further information. This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s side, or all doors and The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 swing gate on the first press of the UNLOCK seconds or they will immediately fade to off button on the RKE transmitter. once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. • For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Ve- hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Elec- NOTE: tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ • The front courtesy overhead console and Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable door courtesy lights will turn on if the Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument .dimmer control is in the ؆Dome ON؆ posi- Panel” for further information tion (extreme top position). Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the • Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or The Illuminated Entry system will not op- NOTE: erate if the dimmer control is in the disabled by performing the following steps: The line of transmission must not be “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom blocked with metal objects. 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a pro- position). grammed RKE transmitter.

16 2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK NOTE: • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, button for at least four seconds, but not longer Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans- perform the following steps: than 10 seconds, then press and hold the RKE mitter while you are inside the vehicle will 1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button transmitter UNLOCK button. activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening for 4 to 10 seconds. 3. Release both buttons at the same time. a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti- 2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicle vated will cause the alarm to sound. Press four seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCK by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve- button. Release both buttons. hicle Security Alarm. RKE transmitter. 3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature NOTE: To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate outside of the vehicle by pressing the RKE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter LOCK button with the ignition switch while you are inside of the vehicle will acti- transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signals will in the LOCK position and the ignition key re- vate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a flash to acknowledge the lock signal. moved. door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti- NOTE: vated will cause the alarm to sound. Press To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to de- This feature will cause the turn signal lights to while you are in the vehicle will activate the flash when the doors are locked or unlocked activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be 5. If the desired programming was not turned on or turned off. To change the current the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat the setting, proceed as follows: cause the alarm to sound. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate above steps. • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to the Vehicle Security Alarm. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument reactivated by repeating this procedure. Panel” for further information.

17 Transmitter Battery Replacement 3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate The recommended replacement battery is the two halves together. from a normal distance, check for these two CR2032. conditions. General Information 1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier 1. Weak battery in transmitter. The expected down, use a flat blade screw driver to pry the frequency of 433.92 MHz as required by EEC life of the battery is a minimum of three years. two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Use regulations. These devices must be certified to 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a extreme care not to damage the seal or internal conform to specific regulations in each indi- radio station tower, airport transmitter, and components. vidual country. Two sets of regulations are in- some mobile or CB radios. volved: ETS (European Telecommunication Standard) 300–220, which most countries use, DOORS and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125, which is based on ETC 300–220 but has addi- tional unique requirements. Other defined re- CAUTION! quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS- Careless handling and storage of the remov- SION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC. Operation is able door panels may damage the seals, subject to the following two conditions: causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte- • This device may not cause harmful interfer- rior. ence. Separating Case Halves • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may 2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid cause undesired operation. touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

18 Upper Half Door Window Removal — Front Door Removal 2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper If Equipped and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® Grasp the half door window and pull upward. WARNING! head driver). Do not drive your vehicle on public roads NOTE: with the doors removed as you will lose the The hinge pin screws and nuts can be protection that they can provide. This proce- stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor. dure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

Upper Half Door Window Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped 1. Grasp the half door window and line up the Hinge Pin Screw pins with the pockets in the lower door. 3. Unplug the wiring harness connector under 2. Push down to ensure the half door window is Door Removal Warning Label the instrument panel by pressing the tab at the fully seated. top of the connector and pulling to disconnect. 1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

19 NOTE: 4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. If the red latch on the connector is locked, Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully pull the red latch down. This will unlock the open as the mirror may damage the paint. connector tab, allowing the tab to be 5. With the door open, lift the door to clear the pressed down and enabling the harness to hinge pins from their hinges and remove the be disconnected. door. NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when remov- ing them. To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the opposite order. Door Removal Warning Label Rear Door Removal (Four-Door 1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage. Models) 2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® WARNING! Door Strap/Harness Location head driver). Do not drive your vehicle on public roads NOTE: 1 — Wiring Harness (follow the harness up and with the doors removed as you will lose the The hinge pin screws and nuts can be under the instrument panel to the connector) protection that they can provide. This proce- 2 — Body Hook stowed in the rear cargo tray located under 3 — Door/Harness Strap dure is furnished for use during off-road the rear loadfloor. operation only.

20 Hinge Pin Screw Trim Access Door Red Connector Latch 3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward. 5. Unplug the wiring harness connector. 6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. 4. Remove the trim access door from the bot- NOTE: 7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the tom of the B-pillar. If the red latch on the connector is locked, hinge pins from their hinges and remove the push the red latch to the right until you can door. only see the latch on one end (right) of the NOTE: connector. This will unlock the connector Doors are heavy; use caution when remov- tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and ing them. enabling the harness to be disconnected. To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the opposite order.

21 DOOR LOCKS WARNING! (Continued) • Manual Door Locks When leaving the vehicle, always remove All doors are equipped with an interior rocker- the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your type door lock lever. To lock a door when vehicle. leaving your vehicle, press the rocker lever • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or forward to the LOCK position and close the with access to an unlocked vehicle. door. To UNLOCK the door press the rocker • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- lever rearward. tended is dangerous for a number of rea- sons. A child or others could be seriously Manual Door Lock (Half Doors) or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, NOTE: brake pedal or the shift lever. The ignition key that is used to start the • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, , and con- vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- sole storage. dren. A child could operate power win- dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. WARNING! Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors) • For personal security reasons and safety Power Door Locks — If Equipped in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when The power door lock switch is located on each you drive, as well as when you park and front door panel. Press the switch forward to leave the vehicle. lock the doors, and rearward to unlock the doors. (Continued)

22 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If WARNING! (Continued) Equipped • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles tended is dangerous for a number of rea- with power door locks if: sons. A child or others could be seriously 1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” fea- or fatally injured. Children should be ture is enabled. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. 2. The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is in • Do not leave the key fob in or near the NEUTRAL or PARK. vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- Power Door Lock Switch dren. A child could operate power win- 3. The driver door is opened. dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 4. The doors were not previously unlocked. WARNING! Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit • For personal security reasons and safety Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped Programming in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when The auto door lock feature default condition is The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature you drive, as well as when you park and enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock can be enabled or disabled as follows: leave the vehicle. automatically when the vehicle’s speed ex- ceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock 1. Close all doors and place the key in the • When leaving the vehicle, always remove feature can be enabled or disabled by your ignition. the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your authorized dealer per written request of the 2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and vehicle. customer. Please see your authorized dealer for ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or service. ending up in the LOCK position. with access to an unlocked vehicle. 3. Press the power door unlock switch to un- lock the doors. (Continued)

23 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear NOTE: the programming. door. For emergency exit with the system en- 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this gaged, move the rocker lever rearward (un- feature to its previous setting. locked position), roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle. NOTE: Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” WINDOWS feature in accordance with local laws. Child-Protection Door Lock Power Windows — If Equipped The power window switches are located on the System — Rear Doors instrument panel below the radio. Press the To provide a safer environment for small chil- switch downward to open the window and up- dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are ward to close the window. equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock sys- Child-Protection Door Lock Function tem. To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a 1. Open the rear door. collision. Remember that the rear doors can 2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock only be opened from the outside when the and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position. Child-Protection locks are engaged.

Power Window Switches

24 The top left switch controls the left front window Four-Door Models the window controls, press the window lockout and the top right switch controls the right front The lower left switch controls the left rear pas- button downward. To enable the window con- window. senger window, and the lower right switch con- trols, press the window lockout button upward. NOTE: trols the right rear passenger window. • For vehicles not equipped with the Elec- Auto-Down tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Both the driver and front passenger window the power window switches will remain switches have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press active for 45 seconds after the ignition the window switch past the first detent, release, switch is turned to the LOCK position. and the window will go down automatically. To Opening either front door will cancel this cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the feature. switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches will remain active To stop the window from going all the way down for up to 10 minutes after the ignition during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the Window Lockout Switch switch is turned to the LOCK position. switch briefly. Rear Power Windows — Four-Door Models Opening either front door will cancel this To partially open the window, press halfway to The rear passenger window switches are lo- feature. The time for this feature is pro- the first detent and release it when you want the cated on the back of the center floor console. grammable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle window to stop. Press the switch downward to open the window Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set- and upward to close the window. tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door Models in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” The window lockout switch (located between for further information. the front window switches) allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console. To disable

25 REAR SWING GATE CAUTION! The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using Do not press on rear wiper blade when the key, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- closing the rear flip-up window, as damage to ter, or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors. the blade will result. To open the swing gate, press the button on the gate handle. WARNING! Driving with the flip-up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door vehicle. You and your passengers could be Models) injured by these fumes. Keep the flip-up Wind Buffeting window closed when you are operating the Wind buffeting can be described as the percep- vehicle. tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS or partially open positions. This is a normal Some of the most important safety features in Gate Handle occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting your vehicle are the restraint systems: the window opening. NOTE: • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the Close the rear flip-up window before at- driver and all passengers tempting to close the swing gate (hard top • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front models only). passenger

26 • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags and child restraint systems. For more informa- WARNING! (Continued) (SAB) — if equipped tion, refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint • System. An energy-absorbing steering column and in a vehicle with a rear seat. steering wheel NOTE: • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multi- stage inflator design. This allows the air bag Children that are not big enough to wear the • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to have different rates of inflation based on vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child that may enhance occupant protection by several factors, including the severity and Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in managing occupant energy during an impact type of collision. child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. event Older children who do not use child restraints or Here are some simple steps you can take to • belt-positioning booster seats should ride prop- All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air erly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow include Automatic Locking Retractors bag: children to slide the shoulder belt behind them (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into or under their arm. position by extending the belt all the way out 1. Children 12 years old and under should and then adjusting the belt to the desired always ride buckled up in a rear seat. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear length to restrain a child seat or secure a facing child seat) must ride in the front passen- large item in a seat — if equipped WARNING! ger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to Please pay close attention to the information in • Never place a rear facing infant seat in “Child Restraints”) this section. It tells you how to use your restraint front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger system properly, to keep you and your passen- Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death You should read the instructions provided with gers as safe as possible. or serious injury to a child 12 years or your child restraint to make sure that you are If you will be carrying children too small for younger, including a child in a rearward using it properly. adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the facing infant seat. 2. All occupants should always wear their ISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infant lap and shoulder belts properly. (Continued) 27 3. The driver and front passenger seats Buckle up even though you are an excellent WARNING! (Continued) should be moved back as far as practical to driver, even on short trips. Someone on the allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to • Being too close to the steering wheel or road may be a poor driver and cause a collision inflate. instrument panel during Advanced Front that includes you. This can happen far away Air Bag deployment could cause serious from home or on your own street. 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy- injury, including death. Air bags need room Research has shown that seat belts save lives, ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries forcefully into the space between you and your arms to reach the steering wheel or in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen the door. instrument panel. when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat • belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs If the vehicle has SAB, they also need risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the to be modified to accommodate a disabled room to inflate. Do not lean against the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be person, contact the Customer Center. Phone door or window. Sit upright in the center of belted at all times. .numbers are provided under ؆If You Need the seat ؆ Assistance . • In a collision, you and your passengers Lap/Shoulder Belts can suffer much greater injuries if you are All seating positions in your vehicle are WARNING! not properly buckled up. You can strike the equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt web- • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to interior of your vehicle or other passen- bing retractor is designed to lock during very more severe injuries in a collision. The air gers, or you can be thrown out of the sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows bags work with your seat belt to restrain vehicle. Always be sure you and others in the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a you properly. In some collisions, the air your vehicle are buckled up properly. collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your you striking the inside of the vehicle or being seat belts even though you have air bags. thrown out. (Continued)

28 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • Two people should never be belted into a inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, single seat belt. People belted together people riding in these areas are more likely can crash into one another in a collision, to be seriously injured or killed. hurting one another badly. Never use a • Do not allow people to ride in any area of lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than your vehicle that is not equipped with seats one person, no matter what their size. and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions seat and using a seat belt properly. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit Pulling Out Belt And Latch Plate • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger- back and adjust the seat. 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the ous. Seat belts are designed to go around 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of latch plate into the buckle until you hear a the large bones of your body. These are the front seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. “click.” the strongest parts of your body and can Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide take the forces of a collision the best. the latch plate up the webbing as far as neces- • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could sary to allow the belt to go around your lap. make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

(Continued) 29 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, WARNING! (Continued) below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap • A belt that is too loose will not protect you belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To properly. In a sudden stop you could move loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch too far forward, increasing the possibility of plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a • A belt that is worn under your arm is collision. dangerous. Your body could strike the in- NOTE: side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on increasing head and neck injury. A belt until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle worn under the arm can cause internal Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder the driver and front passenger (if equipped WARNING! bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so with front passenger BeltAlert®) seat belt is • that your strongest bones will take the buckled. For further information, refer to A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle “Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System force in a collision. will not protect you properly. The lap por- (BeltAlert®)”. tion could ride too high on your body, • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not possibly causing internal injuries. Always protect you from injury during a collision. buckle your belt into the buckle nearest You are more likely to hit your head in a you. collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant (Continued) to be used together.

30 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. ing for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be parts must be replaced immediately. Do not sure the belt is straight. If you can’t disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to assemblies must be replaced after a collision your authorized dealer immediately and if they have been damaged (bent retractor, have it fixed. torn webbing, etc.).

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Removing Slack From Belt that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in Retractor Lockout (Four-Door Models Only) WARNING! the belt. This feature is designed to lock the retractor • A lap belt worn too high can increase the 6. To release the belt, push the red button on whenever the 60% rear seatback is not fully risk of injury in a collision. The belt forces the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to latched. This prevents someone from wearing won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch the rear center lap/shoulder belt when the rear bones, but across your abdomen. Always plate down the webbing to allow the belt to seatback is not fully latched. retract fully. wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as NOTE: possible and keep it snug. WARNING! • If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot (Continued) A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a be pulled out, check that the rear seat- back is fully latched. collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, check-

(Continued) 31 • If the rear seatback is properly latched Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting and the rear center lap/shoulder belt still Procedure cannot be pulled out, the Automatic- Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be lap/shoulder belt. activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible retractor. You will not be able to pull out to the anchor point. more webbing until all of the webbing has 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the been returned back into the retractor. latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme- diately above the latch plate. WARNING! Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded with a lock-out feature to ensure that the rear webbing. The folded webbing must enter the WARNING! slot at the top of the latch plate. seatback is in the fully upright and locked Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so position when occupied. If the rear seatback 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it that the belt rests across the middle of your is not fully upright and locked and the rear clears the folded webbing. shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in be taken to your authorized dealer for ser- Anchorage In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt a collision. vice. Failure to follow this warning could anchorage can be adjusted upward or down- result in serious or fatal injury. ward to position the belt away from your neck. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you Push in on the anchorage near your outside will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the than average, you will prefer a higher position. position that serves you best.

32 When you release the anchorage, try to move it Driver Center Passen- Automatic Locking Retractor Mode up or down to make sure that it is locked in ger (ALR) — If Equipped position. In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically First Row N/A N/A ALR NOTE: pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor- Second ALR ALR ALR any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. Row Locking Mode is available on all passenger- seating positions with a combination lap/ This feature allows the shoulder belt an- • N/A — Not Applicable chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi- shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode tion without pressing the release button. To • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor anytime a is installed in a verify the shoulder belt anchorage is seating position that has a belt with this feature. If the passenger seating position is equipped Children 12 years old and under should always latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt with an ALR and is being used for normal anchorage until it is locked into position. be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear usage: seat. Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Positions comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid- Mode The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR tions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re- is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder tractors which are used to secure a child re- the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract belt. straint system. For additional information, refer completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down- to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle out only the amount of webbing necessary to ward until the entire belt is extracted. Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraint” section. comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid- 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, The chart below defines the type of feature for section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the each seating position. you hear a "click." safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

33 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking This safety belt system has a retractor assem- Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder Mode bly that is designed to release webbing in a System (BeltAlert®) Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and controlled manner. This feature is designed to BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the allow it to retract completely to disengage the help reduce the belt force acting on the occu- driver and front passenger (if equipped with Automatic Locking Mode and activate the ve- pant’s chest. front passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat hicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. belts. The feature is active whenever the igni- Seat Belt Pretensioners tion is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is WARNING! The seat belts for both front seating positions are unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn equipped with pretensioning devices that are de- • The belt and retractor assembly must be on and remain on until both front seat belts are signed to remove slack from the seat belt in the fastened. replaced if the seat belt assembly Auto- event of a collision. These devices may improve matic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or the performance of the seat belt by assuring that The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after any other seat belt function is not working the belt is tight about the occupant early in a the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by properly when checked according to the collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the se- procedures in the Service Manual. pants, including those in child restraints. quence starts, it will continue for the entire • Failure to replace the belt and retractor NOTE: duration or until the respective seatbelts are assembly could increase the risk of injury These devices are not a substitute for fastened. After the sequence completes, the in collisions. proper seat belt placement by the occupant. Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated The seat belt still must be worn snugly and until the respective seat belts are fastened. The positioned properly. driver should instruct all other occupants to Energy Management Feature fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is This vehicle has a safety belt system with an The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu- unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater Energy Management feature in the front seating pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide positions to help further reduce the risk of injury bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A both audio and visual notification. in the event of a head-on collision. deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

34 The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not ac- Seat Belts And Pregnant Women tive when the front passenger seat is unoccu- We recommend that pregnant women use seat pied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the animal or heavy object is on the front passenger mother safe is the best way to keep the baby seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). safe. It is recommended that pets be restrained in the Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet belt across the thighs and as snug across the carriers that are secured by seat belts, and hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it cargo is properly stowed. does not come across the abdomen. That way BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your the strong bones of the hips will take the force if authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not there is a collision. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air recommend deactivating BeltAlert®. Bags NOTE: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for 2 — Knee Bolsters the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to both the driver and right front passenger as a illuminate while the driver’s or front passen- supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. ger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage remains unfastened. in the steering wheel. The passenger Advanced inflator design. This allows the air bag to have Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument different rates of inflation that are based on panel, above the glove compartment. The let- several factors, including the severity and type ters SRS are embossed on the air bag covers. of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passen-

35 • ger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle Instrument Panel WARNING! switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad- • Knee Impact Bolsters vanced Front Air Bags. • No objects should be placed over or near • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag the air bag on the instrument panel, be- This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemen- cause any such objects could cause harm tal Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to pro- • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the vehicle is in a collision severe vide enhanced protection for an occupant dur- • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags enough to cause the air bag to inflate. ing a side impact. The Supplemental Seat- (SAB) Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the • Do not put anything on or around the air outboard side of the front seats. • Front and Side Impact Sensors bag covers or attempt to open them manu- NOTE: • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners and Seat Belt ally. You may damage the air bags and you Buckle Switch could be injured because the air bags may • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the Advanced Front Air Bag Features no longer be functional. The protective interior trim, but they will open during air covers for the air bag cushions are de- bag deployment. The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi- stage driver and front passenger air bags. This signed to open only when the air bags are • After any accident, the vehicle should be system provides output appropriate to the se- inflating. taken to an authorized dealer immedi- verity and type of collision as determined by the • If your vehicle is equipped with Supple- ately. Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which mental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags Air Bag System Components may receive information from the front impact (SAB), do not use accessory seat covers Your vehicle may be equipped with the following sensors. or place objects between you and the air bag system components: The first stage inflator is triggered immediately SAB; the performance could be adversely • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) during an impact that requires air bag deploy- affected and/or objects could be pushed ment. This low output is used in less severe • into you, causing serious injury. Air Bag Warning Light collisions. A higher energy output is used for • Steering Wheel and Column more severe collisions. (Continued)

36 The system includes side impact sensors that are WARNING! (Continued) calibrated to deploy the SAB air bag during im- • If your vehicle is equipped with SAB, do pacts that require air bag occupant protection. not attach cupholders or any other objects SAB air bags are a supplement to the seat belt on or around the door. The inflating SAB restraint system. Occupants, including children could drive the objects into occupants, who are up against or very close to SAB air causing serious injury. bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occu- • Do not cover or place items on the air bag pants, especially children, should not lean on or covers. These items may cause serious sleep against the door, side windows, or area injury during inflation. where the SAB air bags inflate, even if they are • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag in an infant or child restraint. Always sit upright bolster in any way. Location as possible with your back against the seat • Do not mount any accessories to the knee back, use the seat belts properly, and use the When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citi- between the front and side of the seat’s trim or booster seat recommended for the size and zen band radios, etc. cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left weight of the child. side impact deploys the left air bag only and a Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags right-side impact deploys the right air bag only. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the (SAB) — If Equipped NOTE: knees of the driver and front passengers, and Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags position front occupants for the best interaction (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the with the Advanced Front Air Bags. protect an occupant during a side impact. The interior trim, but they will open during air SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into bag deployment. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Ad- the outboard side of the front seats. • Being too close to the SAB during deploy- vanced Front Air Bags work with the knee ment could cause you to be severely impact bolsters to provide improved protection injured or killed. for the driver and front passenger. 37 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, The ORC contains a backup power supply Controls depending on the type and location of impact, system that may deploy the air bags even if the Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes battery loses power or it becomes disconnected Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) with little vehicle front-end damage but that prior to deployment. The ORC is part of a regulated safety system produce a severe initial deceleration. required for this vehicle. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag The side air bags will not deploy in all side Warning Light for four to eight sec- The ORC determines if deployment of the front collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend onds for a self-check when the and/or side air bags is required in a frontal or on the severity and type of collision. ignition is first turned on. After the side collision. Based on the impact sensor’s Because air bag sensors measure vehicle de- self-check, the Air Bag Warning signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc- Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Seat- celeration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of tion in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if equipped, Bag Warning Light either momentarily or con- and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, whether or not an air bag should have de- ployed. tinuously. A single chime will sound if the light depending on several factors, including the comes on again after initial startup. severity and type of impact. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to pro- all crashes, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a vide additional protection by supplementing the malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending The ORC also monitors the readiness of the system. The diagnostics also record the nature on several factors, including the severity and electronic parts of the air bag system whenever of the malfunction. type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, positions. If the key is in the LOCK position, in WARNING! side, or rollover collisions. the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in bag system is not on and the air bags will not all frontal collisions, including some that may inflate. instrument panel could mean you won’t have produce substantial vehicle damage — for ex- ample, some pole collisions, truck under rides, (Continued) 38 WARNING! (Continued) takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then properly, or if items are positioned in the area quickly deflate while helping to restrain the where the side air bag inflates. This especially the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the driver and front passenger. applies to children. light does not come on as a bulb check when The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented Front And Side Impact Sensors the ignition is first turned on, stays on after through the vent holes in the sides of the air In front and side impacts, impact sensors can you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere aid the ORC in determining appropriate re- drive, have an authorized dealer service the with your control of the vehicle. sponse to impact events. air bag system immediately. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags Enhanced Accident Response System (SAB) Inflator Units — If Equipped In the event of an impact causing air bag Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags deployment, if the communication network re- Bag Inflator Units Inflator Units (if equipped) are designed to mains intact, and the power remains intact, The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air activate only in certain side collisions. depending on the nature of the event the ORC Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the will determine whether to have the Enhanced steering wheel and on the right side of the The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity Accident Response System perform the follow- instrument panel. When the ORC detects a ing functions: collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, and type of collision. • it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of Based on the severity and type of collision, the Cut off fuel to the engine. non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Ad- side air bag inflator on the crash side of the • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has vanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation vehicle is triggered, releasing a quantity of power or until the ignition key is turned off. rates are possible, based on several factors, non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as including the collision type and severity. The the seat seam into the space between the long as the battery has power or until the steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate in ignition key is removed. right side of the instrument panel separate and about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their at a very high speed and with such a high force • Unlock the doors automatically. full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to that it could injure you if you are not seated 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it 39 In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re- • As the air bags deflate you may see some WARNING! (Continued) sponse System functions after an event, the smoke-like particles. The particles are a nor- ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to mal by-product of the process that generates ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint IGN OFF. the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your If A Deployment Occurs These airborne particles may irritate the skin, The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye air bag system. The air bag may inflate deflate immediately after deployment. irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For accidentally or may not function properly if nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If modifications are made. Take your vehicle NOTE: the irritation continues, see your doctor. If to an authorized dealer for any air bag Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in these particles settle on your clothing, follow system service. If your seat, including your all collisions. This does not mean some- the garment manufacturer’s instructions for thing is wrong with the air bag system. cleaning. trim cover and cushion, needs to be ser- viced in any way (including removal or • If you do have a collision which deploys the air Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags loosening/tightening of seat attachment bags, any or all of the following may occur: have deployed. If you are involved in another bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized • The nylon air bag material may sometimes collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the accessories may be used. If it is necessary driver and front passenger as the air bags to modify the air bag system for persons deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar WARNING! with disabilities, contact your authorized to friction rope burns or those you might get • Deployed air bags and seat belt preten- dealer. sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. sioners cannot protect you in another col- They are not caused by contact with chemi- lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten- cals. They are not permanent and normally sioner, and seat belt retractor assembly heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have replaced by an authorized dealer immedi- any blistering, see your doctor immediately. (Continued)

40 Maintaining Your Air Bag System Air Bag Warning Light also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly WARNING! You will want to have the air bags check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer ready to inflate for your protection • Modifications to any part of the air bag to the label located on the inside of the fuse in a collision. The Air Bag Warning block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See system could cause it to fail when you Light monitors the internal circuits your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. need it. You could be injured if the air bag and interconnecting wiring associ- system is not there to protect you. Do not ated with air bag system electrical Event Data Recorder (EDR) modify the components or wiring, including components. While the air bag system is de- This vehicle is equipped with an event data adding any kind of badges or stickers to signed to be maintenance free, if any of the recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is the steering wheel hub trim cover or the following occurs, have an authorized dealer to record, in certain crash or near crash-like upper right side of the instrument panel. service the air bag system immediately. situations, such as an air bag deployment or Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in body structure, or add aftermarket side during the four to eight seconds when the understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- steps or running boards. ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN formed. The EDR is designed to record data • You need proper knee impact protection in position. related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds a collision. Do not mount or locate any • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to aftermarket equipment on or behind the the four to eight-second interval. record such data as: knee bolsters. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter- • How various systems in your vehicle were • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of mittently or remains on while driving. the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell operating; NOTE: anyone who works on your vehicle that it • Whether or not the driver and passenger If the , , or any en- has an air bag system. safety belts were buckled/fastened; gine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may

41 • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing Child Restraints Before buying any restraint system, make sure the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled that it has a label certifying that it meets all • How fast the vehicle was traveling. up at all times, including babies and children. applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle These data can help provide a better under- where you will use it. standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. WARNING! NOTE: • “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward- EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if facing child restraint on a seat protected by a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data an air bag in front of it!” Refer to visor and are recorded by the EDR under normal driving door shut face mounted labels for informa- conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, tion. gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. • In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a However, other parties, such as law enforce- Children 12 years or younger should ride prop- tiny baby, can become a projectile inside ment, could combine the EDR data with the erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. the vehicle. The force required to hold type of personally identifying data routinely According to crash statistics, children are safer even an infant on your lap could become acquired during a crash investigation. when properly restrained in the rear seats so great that you could not hold the child, To read data recorded by an EDR, special rather than in the front. no matter how strong you are. The child equipment is required, and access to the ve- There are different sizes and types of restraints and others could be badly injured. Any hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the for children from newborn size to the child child riding in your vehicle should be in a vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law almost large enough for an adult safety belt. proper restraint for the child’s size. enforcement, that have the special equipment, Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to can read the information if they have access to make sure you have the correct seat for your the vehicle or the EDR. child.

42 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers and who have not reached the height or Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of weight limits of their child restraint the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five- Small Children who have out-grown the height or weight limit point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of their rear-facing child restraint of the vehicle Children who have out-grown their forward- Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children facing child restraint, but are too small to seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of Children Too Large for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of their the vehicle booster seat

43 Infants And Child Restraints WARNING! All children whose weight or height is above the Safety experts recommend that children ride forward-facing limit for the child seat should use rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two • Never place a rear facing infant seat in a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s years old or until they reach either the height or front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while Two types of child restraints can be used or serious injury to a child 12 years or the child’s back is against the seatback, they rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible younger, including a child in a rearward should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child seats. facing infant seat. child and belt-positioning booster seat are held The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in the vehicle by the seat belt. in the vehicle. It is recommended for children in a vehicle with a rear seat. from birth until they reach the weight or height WARNING! limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats Older Children And Child Restraints • Improper installation can lead to failure of can be used either rearward-facing or forward- Children who are two years old or who have an infant or child restraint. It could come facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat loose in a collision. The child could be often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward- badly injured or killed. Follow the child facing direction than infant carriers do, so they facing child seats and convertible child seats can be used rearward-facing by children who restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly used in the forward-facing direction are for when installing an infant or child restraint. have outgrown their infant carrier but are still children who are over two years old or who have • When your child restraint is not in use, less than at least two years old. Children should outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remain rearward-facing until they reach the of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Chil- highest weight or height allowed by their con- dren should remain in a forward-facing child ISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from the vertible child seat. seat with a harness for as long as possible, up vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. to the highest weight or height allowed by the In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike child seat. the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

44 Children Too Large For Booster Seats 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, Children who are large enough to wear the touching the child’s thighs and not their stom- shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are ach? long enough to bend over the front of the seat 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the when their back is against the seatback, should whole trip? use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use If the answer to any of these questions was the vehicle’s seat belt alone: “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. A back of the vehicle seat? child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still face or neck, move the child closer to the center sitting all the way back? of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. shoulder between their neck and arm?

45 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weight Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below of the Child + Child ISOFIX – Lower An- ISOFIX – Lower An- Seat Belt + Top Restraint Seat Belt Only chors + Top Tether chors Only Tether Anchor Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

46 Universal Child Seat Position Chart 4 Door Seating Position Key of letters used in the table above: Seating Position • U=Suitable for “universal” category restraints 2 Door Seating Position approved for use in this mass group. Mass Front Rear Rear Seating Position Group Pas- Out- • UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal” Center Mass Group Front Rear senger board category restraints approved for use in this mass group. Passenger Outboard 0-Up XU U • 0-Upto XUto 10 kg L = Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may 10 kg 0+-Up XU U be of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or to 13 kg 0+-Upto XU “semi-universal” categories. 13 kg I-9to XU U • B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass 18 kg I-9to XU group. 18 kg II-15to XU U • X = Seat position not suitable for children in 25 kg II-15to XU this mass group. 25 kg III-22 XU U III-22to XUto 36 kg 36 kg

47 2 Door Seating Position Size Class Fixture Seating Position Mass Group Front Passenger Rear Outboard E ISO/R1 X X 0-Upto10kg (1) X X E ISO/R1 X X D ISO/R2 X X 0+-Upto13kg C ISO/R3 X X (1) X X D ISO/R2 X X C ISO/R3 X X B ISO/F2 X IUF I-9to18kg B1 ISO/F2X X IUF A ISO/F3 X IUF (1) X X II-15to25kg (1) X X III-22to36kg (1) X X

48 4 Door Seating Position Size Class Fixture Seating Position Mass Group Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center E ISO/R1 X IUF X 0-Upto10kg (1) X X X E ISO/R1 X IUF X D ISO/R2 X X X 0+-Upto13kg C ISO/R3 X X X (1) X X X D ISO/R2 X X X C ISO/R3 X X X B ISO/F2 X IUF X I-9to18kg B1 ISO/F2X X IUF X A ISO/F3 X IUF X (1) X X X II-15to25kg (1) X X X III-22to36kg (1) X X X

49 (1) — For the child restraint systems (CRS) the seat cushion where it meets the seatback which do not carry the ISO/XX size class iden- and one top tether anchorage located behind tification (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the seating position. These anchorages are the manufacturer will indicate the vehicle spe- used to install ISOFIX-equipped child seats cific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) recom- without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some mended for each position. seating positions may have a top tether anchor- Key of letters used in the table above: age but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the • IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child re- top tether anchorage to install the child straint systems of “universal” category ap- restraint. proved for use in the mass group. Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages ISOFIX Anchorages (Two-Door Models) • IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child re- straint systems (CRS) given in the attached The lower anchorages are round list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the bars that are found at the rear of “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi- the seat cushion where it meets the universal” categories. seatback, below the anchorage • X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX symbols on the seatback. They are child restraint systems in this mass group just visible when you lean into the and/or this size class. rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the ISOFIX Restraint System gap between the seatback and seat cushion. Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called ISOFIX. The ISOFIX system has three vehicle anchor points for ISOFIX Anchorages (Four-Door Models) installing ISOFIX-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of

50 Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages 2–Door Center Seat ISOFIX

In addition, there are tether strap WARNING! anchors located behind each rear This vehicle does not have a center seating seatback, near to the floor. position. Do not use the center lower ISOFIX anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat.

4–Door Center Seat ISOFIX Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models) Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only ISOFIX child restraint systems will be equipped install this type of child restraint in the outboard with a rigid bar on each side. Each will have a seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, connector to attach to the lower anchorage and webbing mounted lower attachments can be a way to tighten the connection to the anchor- installed in any rear seating position. age. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints may also be WARNING! Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models) equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top Never use the same lower anchorage to tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap attach more than one child restraint. If you after it is attached to the anchorage. are installing ISOFIX child restraints next to each other, you must use the seat belt for the center position. You can then use either the

(Continued)

51 WARNING! (Continued) 3. Place the child seat between the lower an- 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly chorages for that seating position. For some by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the ISOFIX anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for second row seats, you may need to recline the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch installing child seats in the outboard posi- seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a (25.4 mm) in any direction. tions. Please refer to “Installing The ISOFIX better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to Child Restraint System” for typical installa- When using the ISOFIX attaching system to move it to its rear-most position to make room tion instructions. install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts for the child seat. You may also move the front that are not being used by other occupants or seat forward to allow more room for the car Always follow the directions of the child restraint being used to secure child restraints. An unused seat. manufacturer when installing your child re- belt could injure a child if they play with it and straint. Not all child restraint systems will be 4. Attach the connectors of the child restraint to accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installed as described here. the lower anchorages in the selected seating installing a child restraint using the ISOFIX position. system, buckle the seat belt behind the child To install an ISOFIX Child Restraint: 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, con- restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the 1. If the selected seating position has a Swit- nect it to the top tether anchorage. See the buckled seat belt interferes with the child re- chable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat section “Installing Child Restraints Using the straint installation, instead of buckling it behind belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc- Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a the child restraint, route the seat belt through tions below. See the section “Installing Child tether anchor. the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in what type of seat belt each seating position has. 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and restraint rearward and downward into the seat. 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower connec- that they should not play with them. Remove slack in the straps according to the tors and on the tether strap of the child seat so child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

52 WARNING! by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor to pass it through the belt path of • Improper installation of a child restraint to the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing the ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failure clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back in the belt path. of an infant or child restraint. The child into the retractor. For additional information on 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” could be badly injured or killed. Follow the hear a “click.” manufacturer’s directions exactly when in- description under “Occupant Restraints.” The stalling an infant or child restraint. cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child re- withstand only those loads imposed by 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the straint’s belt path. correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all circumstances are they to be used for Installing A Child Restraint With A the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retrac- adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach- Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) tor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a ing other items or equipment to the vehicle clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now 1. Place the child seat in the center of the in the Automatic Locking mode. Installing Child Restraints Using The seating position. For some second row seats, 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If Vehicle Seat Belt you may need to recline the seat and/or raise it is locked, you should not be able to pull out The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, tions are equipped with either a Switchable seat can be moved forward and rearward in the repeat step 5. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinch- vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most ing latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts position to make room for the child seat. You are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat may also move the front seat forward to allow belt tight around the child restraint so that it is more room for the car seat. not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode

53 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to Installing A Child Restraint With A 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Cinching Latch Plate (CINCH) — If and the seating position has a top tether an- while you push the child restraint rearward and Equipped chorage, connect the tether strap to the anchor- downward into the vehicle seat. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the age and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “In- 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap seating position. For some second row seats, stalling Child Restraints Using The Top Tether and the seating position has a top tether an- you may need to recline the seat and / or raise Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether chorage, connect the tether strap to the anchor- the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear anchor. age and tighten the tether strap. See the section seat can be moved forward and rearward in the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether position to make room for the child seat. You belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch anchor. may also move the front seat forward to allow (25.4 mm) in any direction. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly more room for the car seat. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch from the retractor to pass it through the belt path necessary. (25.4 mm) in any direction. of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so webbing in the belt path. close to the belt path opening of the child check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you restraint, you may have trouble tightening the necessary. hear a “click.” seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle- 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert tighten the lap portion around the child restraint the latch plate into the buckle with the release while you push the child restraint rearward and button facing out, away from the child restraint. downward into the vehicle seat. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child restraint.

54 If the belt still cannot be tightened after you strap under the head restraint and between the shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate two posts. If not possible, lower the head re- from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half straint and pass the tether strap around the turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle outboard side of the head restraint. again. If you still cannot make the child restraint 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child installation tight, try a different seating position. restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown Installing Child Restraints Using The Top in the diagram. Tether Anchorage 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models) forward to provide better access to the tether 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- for that seating position, move the child restraint tions. to another position in the vehicle if one is available. WARNING! 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could direct path for the strap between the anchor and Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models) the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with lead to increased head motion and pos- adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head sible injury to the child. Use only the an- restraint, and where possible, route the tether chorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

(Continued) 55 WARNING! (Continued) ENGINE BREAK-IN CAUTION! • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear RECOMMENDATIONS Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight seat, make sure the tether strap does not A long break-in period is not required for the Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may slip into the opening between the seat- engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in result. backs as you remove slack in the strap. your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles NOTE: Transporting Pets (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), A new engine may consume some oil during Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown desirable. operation. This should be considered a nor- about and possibly injured, or injure a passen- While cruising, brief full- acceleration mal part of the break-in and not interpreted ger during panic braking or in a collision. within the limits of local traffic laws contributes as an indication of difficulty. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera- harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by tion in low gear can be detrimental and should Additional Requirements For Diesel seat belts. be avoided. Engine — If Equipped The engine oil installed in the engine at the During the first 900 miles (1500 km) avoid factory is a high-quality energy conserving type heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do not lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine anticipated climate conditions under which ve- speed for each gear. Change gear in good time. hicle operations will occur. For the recom- Do not shift down a gear manually in order to mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to brake. “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

56 SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main- Transporting Passengers WARNING! tained engine exhaust system. NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con- Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of CARGO AREA. tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is color- the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the less and odorless. Breathing it can make you WARNING! underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, unconscious and can eventually poison you. have a competent mechanic inspect the com- • Do not leave children or animals inside To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior tips: for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi- heat build-up may cause serious injury or • Do not run the engine in a closed garage tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections death. or in confined areas any longer than could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo needed to move your vehicle in or out of passenger compartment. In addition, inspect area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a the area. the exhaust system each time the vehicle is collision, people riding in these areas are • If you are required to drive with the trunk/ raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. more likely to be seriously injured or killed. liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all • Do not allow people to ride in any area of windows are closed and the climate con- your vehicle that is not equipped with seats trol BLOWER switch is set at high speed. and seat belts. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle seat and using a seat belt properly. with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

57 Defroster Safety Checks You Should Make WARNING! (Continued) Inside The Vehicle Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You • Never place or install floor mats or other Seat Belts should be able to feel the air directed against floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot Inspect the belt system periodically, checking the windshield. See your authorized dealer for be properly secured to prevent them from for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts service if your defroster is inoperable. moving and interfering with the pedals or must be replaced immediately. Do not disas- the ability to control the vehicle. semble or modify the system. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot- • Never put floor mats or other floor cover- Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that ings on top of already installed floor mats. after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are Additional floor mats and other coverings be replaced after a collision if they have been firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of will reduce the size of the pedal area and damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, position and interfere with the pedals or impair interfere with the pedals. etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. retractor condition, replace the belt. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure Air Bag Warning Light WARNING! floor mats that have been removed for Pedals that cannot move freely can cause cleaning. The light should come on and re- loss of vehicle control and increase the risk • main on for four to eight seconds Always make sure that objects cannot fall as a bulb check when the ignition of serious personal injury. into the driver footwell while the vehicle is switch is first turned ON. If the light • Always make sure that floor mats are moving. Objects can become trapped un- is not lit during starting, see your properly attached to the floor mat fasten- der the brake pedal and accelerator pedal authorized dealer. If the light stays ers. causing a loss of vehicle control. on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. (Continued) (Continued)

58 Lights WARNING! (Continued) Have someone observe the operation of brake • If required, mounting posts must be prop- lights and exterior lights while you work the erly installed, if not equipped from the controls. Check turn signal and high beam factory. indicator lights on the instrument panel. Failure to properly follow floor mat installa- Door Latches tion or mounting can cause interference with Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. the brake pedal and accelerator pedal opera- Fluid Leaks tion causing loss of control of the vehicle. Check area under vehicle after overnight park- ing for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid Periodic Safety Checks You Should leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if Make Outside The Vehicle fuel, fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be Tires located and corrected immediately. Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

59 60 3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• MIRRORS ...... 66 • Inside Day/Night Mirror ...... 66 • Outside Mirrors ...... 66 • Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ...... 67 • Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 67 • Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 67 • Vanity Mirrors ...... 67 • Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED ...... 68 • Operation ...... 69 • Phone Call Features ...... 74 • Uconnect® Phone Features...... 75 • Advanced Phone Connectivity ...... 78 • Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone .....79 • VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED ...... 86 • Voice Command System Operation ...... 86 • Commands ...... 87 • Voice Training...... 89

61 • SEATS ...... 89 • Front Seat Adjustment ...... 89 • Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped ...... 90 • Front Seatback Recline ...... 90 • Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door Models ...... 90 • Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models ...... 91 • Heated Seats — If Equipped ...... 92 • Head Restraints ...... 93 • Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door Models ...... 94 • Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models ...... 94 • Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models ...... 95 • 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door Models ...... 95 • TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ...... 96 • LIGHTS ...... 97 • Multifunction Lever ...... 97 • Headlights And Position Lights ...... 97 • Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 97 • Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) ...... 98 • Turn Signals ...... 98 • Lane Change Assist ...... 98 • Lights-On Reminder ...... 98 • High/Low Beam Switch ...... 99 • Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...... 99 • Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped...... 99 • Instrument Panel Dimmer ...... 99 • Interior Lights ...... 99 62 • Headlight Leveling System — If Equipped ...... 100 • WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...... 102 • Windshield Wiper Operation ...... 102 • Intermittent Wiper System ...... 102 • Windshield Washers ...... 103 • Mist Feature ...... 103 • TILT STEERING COLUMN ...... 103 • ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ...... 104 • To Activate ...... 104 • To Set A Desired Speed ...... 105 • To Deactivate ...... 105 • To Resume Speed...... 105 • To Vary The Speed Setting ...... 105 • To Accelerate For Passing...... 105 • ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET ...... 106 • CUPHOLDERS ...... 108 • Front Cupholders ...... 108 • Rear Cupholders ...... 108 • STORAGE ...... 108 • Glovebox Storage...... 108 • Console Storage Compartment ...... 109 • Rear Storage Compartment ...... 109 • DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED ...... 109 • Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models...... 110 • Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models ...... 111 • DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED ...... 112 • Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models ...... 112 63 • Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models ...... 114 • FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED ...... 116 • Front Panel(s) Removal ...... 117 • Freedom Top™ Storage Bag...... 118 • Front Panel(s) Installation ...... 119 • Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top Removed...... 120 • Rear Hard Top Removal ...... 120 • Rear Hard Top Installation ...... 122 • DOOR FRAME ...... 122 • Door Frame Removal ...... 123 • Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models-If Equipped ...... 124 • Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models-If Equipped ...... 125 • SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS ...... 127 • Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top ...... 128 • Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top ...... 130 • Lowering The Soft Top ...... 133 • Raising The Soft Top ...... 139 • SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS ...... 145 • Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top...... 146 • Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top...... 148 • Folding Down The Soft Top ...... 151 • Putting Up The Soft Top ...... 158 • SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS)...... 163 • Opening The Sunrider® ...... 164 • Closing The Sunrider® ...... 165

64 • SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) ...... 165 • Opening The Sunrider® ...... 165 • Closing The Sunrider®...... 167 • FOLDING WINDSHIELD ...... 167 • Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars ...... 168 • Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars ...... 170 • REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY ...... 171 • Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped ...... 171 • Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ...... 171

65 MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear Adjusting Rearview Mirror Outside Rearview Mirror window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can Outside Mirrors WARNING! To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside be reduced by moving the small control under Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas- the mirror to the night position (toward the rear mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic senger side convex mirror will look smaller of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the while the small control under the mirror is set in inside mirror. and farther away than they really are. Rely- the day position (toward the windshield). ing too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another ve- hicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a ve- hicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

66 After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If CAUTION! Equipped same direction you want the mirror to move. To avoid damage to the mirror during clean- This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight Use the center off position to guard against glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the ing, never spray any cleaning solution di- accidentally moving a mirror position. feature on or off by pressing the button at the rectly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of These mirrors are heated to melt frost the button does not illuminate. Power Mirrors — If Equipped or ice. This feature can be activated The power mirror switch is located on the center whenever you turn on the rear window NOTE: of the instrument panel, below the climate con- defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear This feature is disabled when the vehicle is trols. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea- moving in reverse. mirror or off position. tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Vanity Mirrors Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the mirrors, rotate the down and swing the mirror cover upward.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Power Mirror Switch

67 or “Dial”…“151-1234 -5555"). Your mobile without wires or a docking station, so phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you cle’s audio system; the system will automati- stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, cally mute your radio when using the pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is Uconnect® Phone. turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s * The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone al- phone equipped with the Bluetooth® lows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to ؆Hands-Free Profile,؆ version 1.0 or higher. the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile See Uconnect® website for supported phones. phone can be used with the Uconnect® Phone at a time. The Uconnect® Phone is available in NOTE: English, Dutch, French, German, Italian or Vanity Mirror For Uconnect® Phone customer support, Spanish languages (as equipped). Uconnect® Phone — IF visit the following website: • EQUIPPED www.UconnectPhone.com WARNING! Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls Any voice commanded system should be NOTE: between the Uconnect® Phone and your mobile used only in safe driving conditions following For Uconnect® Phone with Navigation radio, phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and all applicable laws, including laws regarding refer to the Navigation radio Manual’s (sepa- enables you to mute the Uconnect® Phone’s phone use. Your attention should be focused rate booklet) Uconnect® Phone section. microphone for private conversation. on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands- so may result in a collision causing serious free, in-vehicle communications system. The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone Bluetooth® “Hands-Free profile” mobile phone. injury or death. number with your mobile phone* using simple Uconnect® Phone features Bluetooth® technol- voice commands (e.g., “Call”…“Jim”… “Work” ogy - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other

68 • Uconnect® Phone Button Uconnect® Phone features. Refer to your mo- • For certain operations, compound com- bile service provider or the phone manufacturer mands can be used. For example, instead of The radio or steering wheel con- for details. saying “Setup” and then “Phone Pairing.” the trols (if equipped) will contain the following compound command can be said: two control buttons (Uconnect® The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with “Setup Phone Pairing.” Phone button and Voice Com- the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the mand button) that will enable Uconnect® Phone can be adjusted either from • For each feature explanation in this section, only you to access the system. When you press the the radio volume control knob or from the the compound form of the voice command is button you will hear the word Uconnect® fol- steering wheel radio control, if so equipped. given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when lowed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal to The radio display will be used for visual prompts you are asked for it. For example, you can use give a command. from the Uconnect® Phone such as "CELL" or the compound form voice command “Phone- NOTE: caller ID on certain radios. book New Entry”, or you can break the com- The driver side upper windshield trim con- Operation pound form command into two voice com- tains the microphone for the Uconnect® mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please Phone. Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect® Phone and to navigate through the remember, the Uconnect® Phone works best • Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone menu structure. Voice com- when you talk in a normal conversational tone, mands are required after most Uconnect® as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ Actual button location may vary meters away from you. with radio. The individual buttons Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a are described in the “Operation” specific command and then guided through the Natural Speech available options. section. Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a • Prior to giving a voice command, one must Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) en- gine. The Uconnect® Phone can be used with wait for the beep, which follows the “Ready” Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile prompt or another prompt. phones. Some phones may not support all the

69 Natural speech allows the user to speak com- “Help” following the beep. The Uconnect® The following are general phone to Uconnect® mands in phrases or complete sentences. The Phone will play all the options at any prompt if Phone pairing instructions: system filters out certain non-word utterances you ask for help. • Press the button to begin. and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, • After the “Ready” prompt and the following handles fill-in words such as “I would like to.” button and follow the au- simply press the beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.” The system handles multiple inputs in the same dible prompts for directions. All Uconnect® phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call” Phone sessions begin with a press of the • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a and “to Kelly Smith.” For multiple inputs in the button on the radio control head. Phone” and follow the audible prompts. same phrase or sentence, the system identifies Cancel Command • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal the topic or context and provides the associated At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Identification Number (PIN), which you will follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main later need to enter into your mobile phone. call?” in the case where a phone call was menu. However, in a few instances the system You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not requested but the specific name was not recog- will take you back to the previous menu. need to remember this PIN after the initial nized. pairing process. Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a Mobile The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the Phone • For identification purposes, you will be system requires more information from the user To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you prompted to give the Uconnect® Phone a it will ask a question to which the user can must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled name for your mobile phone. Each mobile respond without pressing the Voice Command mobile phone (refer to “Introduction” section to phone that is paired should be given a unique button on your steering wheel. learn about the phone type). phone name. Voice Command Tree To complete the pairing process, you will need • You will then be asked to give your mobile Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. to reference your mobile phone owner’s phone a priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 Help Command manual. The Uconnect® website may also pro- being the highest priority. You can pair up to If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you vide detailed instructions for pairing. seven mobile phones to your Uconnect® want to know your options at any prompt, say Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to 70 your Uconnect® System. The priority allows Call by Saying a Name Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may sup- the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile port this feature. See Uconnect® website for sup- • Press the button to begin. phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in ported phones. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following the vehicle at the same time. For example, if • To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect®) beep, say “Call.” priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use • The system will prompt you to say the name Saying a Name” section. the priority 3 mobile phone when you make a of the person you want to call. call. You can select to use a lower priority • Automatic download and update, if sup- mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced • After the “Ready” prompt and the following ported, begins as soon as the phone Phone Connectivity”). beep, say the name of the person you want Bluetooth® wireless connection is made to to call. For example, you can say “John Doe.” the Uconnect® Phone. For example, after Dial by Saying a Number where John Doe is a previously stored name you start the vehicle. • button to begin. entry in the Uconnect® phonebook or down- Press the • Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be loaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • After the “Ready” prompt and the following downloaded and updated every time a phone name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names beep, say “Dial.” is connected to the Uconnect® Phone. to Your Uconnect® Phonebook.” • The system will prompt you to say the num- • • The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the name Depending on the maximum number of en- ber you want to call. and then dial the corresponding phone num- tries downloaded, there may be a short delay • For example, you can say “151-1234-5555.” ber, which may appear in the display of before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously certain radios. • The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone downloaded phonebook is available for use. number and then dial. The number will ap- Phonebook Download – Automatic • pear in the display of certain radios. Phonebook Transfer from Mobile Phone Only the phonebook of the currently con- If equipped and specifically supported by your nected mobile phone is accessible. phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads • Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the names (text names) and number entries from the mobile phones SIM card phonebook is mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® downloaded. 71 • This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed- • When prompted, recite the phone number for • After the “Ready” prompt and the following ited or deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. the phonebook entry that you are adding. beep, say “Phonebook Edit.” These can only be edited on the mobile After you are finished adding an entry into the • You will then be asked for the name of the phone. The changes are transferred and phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to phonebook entry that you wish to edit. updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next add more phone numbers to the current entry or phone connection. to return to the main menu. • Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up • When prompted, recite the new phone num- NOTE: to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers ber for the phonebook entry that you are Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook and designations. Each language has a sepa- editing. is recommended when the vehicle is not in rate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that motion. After you are finished editing an entry in the language. In addition, if equipped and sup- phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to • Press the button to begin. ported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone auto- edit another entry in the phonebook, call the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following matically downloads mobile phone’s phone- number you just edited, or return to the main beep, say “Phonebook New Entry”. book. menu. • When prompted, say the name of the new Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries “Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another entry. Use of long names helps the Voice NOTE: phone number to a name entry that already Command and it is recommended. For ex- Editing phonebook entries is recommended exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry ample, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” in- when the vehicle is not in motion. John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work stead of “Bob”. Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can- number later using the “Phonebook Edit” fea- • When prompted, enter the number designa- not be deleted or edited. ture. tion (e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or • Press the button to begin. “Other”). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired. 72 Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry • Note that only the phonebook entry in the List All Uconnect® Phonebook Names current language is deleted. NOTE: • Press the button to begin. • Editing phonebook entries is recommended Automatic downloaded phonebook entries • After the “Ready” prompt and the following when the vehicle is not in motion. cannot be deleted or edited. beep, say “Phonebook List Names.” • Press the button to begin. Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook • The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of Entries • After the “Ready” prompt and the following all the phonebook entries, including the • beep, say “Phonebook Delete.” Press the button to begin. downloaded phonebook entries, if available. • • • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, After the “Ready” prompt and the following To call one of the names in the list, press the you will then be asked for the name of the beep, say “Phonebook Erase All.” button during the playing of the desired name, and say “Call.” entry that you wish to delete. You can either • The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify say the name of a phonebook entry that you that you wish to delete all the entries from the NOTE: wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to phonebook. The user can also exercise “Edit” or “De- hear a list of the entries in the phonebook • lete” operations at this point. from which you choose. To select one of the After confirmation, the phonebook entries will entries from the list, press the button be deleted. • The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you while the Uconnect® Phone is playing the • Note that only the phonebook in the current as to the number designation you wish to desired entry and say “Delete.” language is deleted. call. • After you enter the name, the Uconnect® • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries • The selected number will be dialed. Phone will ask you which designation you cannot be deleted or edited. wish to delete; home, work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete.

73 Phone Call Features NOTE: Toggling Between Calls The following features can be accessed through The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones If two calls are in progress (one active and one the Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are avail- in the market today do not support rejecting on hold), press the button until you hear a able on your mobile service plan. For example, an incoming call when another call is in single beep, indicating that the active and hold if your mobile service plan provides three-way progress. Therefore, the user can only an- status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one time. calling, this feature can be accessed through swer an incoming call or ignore it. the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile Conference Call service provider for the features that you have. Making a Second Call While Current Call in When two calls are in progress (one active and Progress Answer or Reject an Incoming Call – No one on hold), press and hold the button until To make a second call while you are currently Call Currently in Progress you hear a double beep indicating that the two on a call, press the When you receive a call on your mobile phone, button and say “Dial” or calls have been joined into one conference call. the Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle “Call” followed by the phone number or phone- book entry you wish to call. The first call will be Three-Way Calling audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like on hold while the second call is in progress. To To initiate three-way calling, press the but- to answer the call. Press the button to ac- go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling ton while a call is in progress, and make a cept the call. To reject the call, press and hold second phone call, as described under “Making the button until you hear a single beep, Between Calls.” To combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call.” a Second Call While Current Call in Progress.” indicating that the incoming call was rejected. After the second call has established, press and Answer or Reject an Incoming Call – Call Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold hold the button until you hear a double beep, Currently in Progress To put a call on hold, press the button until indicating that the two calls have been joined you hear a single beep. This indicates that the If a call is currently in progress and you have into one conference call. call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, another incoming call, you will hear the same button until you hear a network tones for call waiting that you normally press and hold the single beep. hear when using your mobile phone. Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

74 Call Termination Call Continuation Uconnect® Phone Features To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Call continuation is the progression of a phone Language Selection button. Only the active call(s) will be termi- call on the Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle To change the language that the Uconnect® nated and if there is a call on hold, it will become ignition has been switched to OFF. Call continu- Phone is using: the new active call. If the active call is termi- ation functionality available on the vehicle can nated by the phone far end, a call on hold may be any one of three types: • Press the button to begin. not become active automatically. This is cell • After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call • After the “Ready” prompt and the following phone-dependent. To bring the call back from can continue on the Uconnect® Phone either beep, say the name of the language you wish hold, press and hold the button until you until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery to switch to (English, Dutch, French, Ger- hear a single beep. condition dictates cessation of the call on the man, Italian, or Spanish, if so equipped). Redial Uconnect® Phone and transfer of the call to • Continue to follow the system prompts to • Press the button to begin. the mobile phone. complete language selection. • • After the “Ready” prompt and the following After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all beep, say “Redial.” continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a prompts and voice commands will be in that certain duration, after which the call is auto- language. • The Uconnect® Phone will call the last num- matically transferred from the Uconnect® ber that was dialed from your mobile phone. Phone to the mobile phone. NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change NOTE: • An active call is automatically transferred to This may not be the last number dialed from the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled operation, only the language-specific 32-name the Uconnect® Phone. to OFF. phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific and usable across all languages.

75 Emergency Assistance — If Equipped • The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower Paging If you are in an emergency and the mobile your chances of successfully making a To learn how to page, refer to “Working with phone is reachable: phone call as to that for the mobile phone Automated Systems.” Paging works properly directly. • Pick up the phone and manually dial the except for pagers of certain companies, which emergency number for your area. time out a little too soon to work properly with WARNING! the Uconnect® Phone. If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is operational, you may To use you Uconnect® Phone System in an Voice Mail Calling reach the emergency number as follows: emergency, your mobile phone must be: To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to • turned on, “Working with Automated Systems.” • Press the button to begin. • paired to the Uconnect® System, Working with Automated Systems • After the “Ready” prompt and the following • and have network coverage. This method is used in instances where one beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect® generally has to press numbers on the mobile Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone Breakdown Service — If Equipped phone keypad while navigating through an au- to call the emergency number. If you need Breakdown service: tomated telephone system. NOTE: • Press the button to begin. You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access • The default number is 112. The number a voice mail system or an automated service, • After the “Ready” prompt and the following such as a paging service or automated cus- dialed may not be applicable with the beep, say “Breakdown service.” available mobile service and area. tomer service. Some services require immedi- NOTE: ate response selection. In some instances, that • If supported, this number may be pro- The Breakdown service number has to be may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® grammable on some systems. To do this, Phone. press the button and say “Setup,” fol- setup before using. To setup, press the lowed by “Emergency.” button and say “Setup, Breakdown Ser- vice” and follow prompts.

76 When calling a number with your Uconnect® NOTE: Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off Phone that normally requires you to enter in a • Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone You may not hear all of the tones due to system from confirming your choices (e.g., the keypad, you can press the button and say mobile phone network configurations; Uconnect® Phone will not repeat a phone num- the sequence you wish to enter followed by the this is normal. ber before you dial it). • word “Send.” For example, if required to enter Some paging and voice mail systems • Press the button to begin. your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),you have system time out settings that are too can press the button and say, “3746# short and may not allow the use of this • After the “Ready” prompt and the following Send.” Saying a number, or sequence of num- feature. beep, say: bers, followed by “Send,” is also to be used for • Barge In – Overriding Prompts “Setup Confirmations Prompts On” navigating through an automated customer ser- The “Voice Command” button can be used • “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off” vice center menu structure, and to leave a when you wish to skip part of a prompt and number on a pager. Phone and Network Status Indicators issue your voice command immediately. For If available on the radio and/or on a premium You can also send stored Uconnect® Phone- example, if a prompt is asking “Would you like to display such as the instrument panel cluster, … book entries as tones for fast and easy access pair a phone, clear a ,” you could press the and supported by your mobile phone, the to voice mail and pager entries. To use this button and say, “Pair a Phone” to select Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to feature, dial the number you wish to call and that option without having to listen to the rest of inform you of your phone and network status then press the button and say “Send.” The the voice prompt. when you are attempting to make a phone call system will prompt you to enter the name or using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for number and say the name of the phonebook roaming, network signal strength, phone battery entry you wish to send. The Uconnect® Phone strength, etc. will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

77 Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off) Connect or Disconnect Link Between the You can dial a phone number with your mobile When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will Uconnect® Phone and Mobile Phone phone keypad and still use the Uconnect® still be able to hear the conversation coming Your mobile phone can be paired with many Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone key- from the other party, but the other party will not different electronic devices, but can only be pad, the user must exercise caution and take be able to hear you. To mute the Uconnect® actively connected with one electronic device at precautionary safety measures). By dialing a Phone: a time. number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile • Press the button. If you would like to connect or disconnect the phone, the audio will be played through your Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect® • Following the beep, say “Mute.” vehicles audio system. The Uconnect® Phone Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect® will work the same as if you dial the number To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone: Phone, follow the instructions described in your using Voice Command. • Press the button. mobile phone User’s Manual. NOTE: • List Paired Mobile Phone Names Certain brands of mobile phones do not Following the beep, say “Mute off.” • Press the button to begin. send the dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone Advanced Phone Connectivity to play it on the system, so • After the “Ready” prompt and the following you will not hear it. Under this situation, Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.” The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to after successfully dialing a number the user • be transferred from your mobile phone to the When prompted, say “List Phones.” may feel that the call did not go through Uconnect® Phone without terminating the call. even though the call is in progress. Once To transfer an ongoing call from your your call is answered, you will hear the Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the audio. Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the button and say “Transfer Call.”

78 • The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone using the highest priority phone present in or Voice Training names of all paired mobile phones in order near (approximately within 30 ft. (9 m)) the For users experiencing difficulty with the from the highest to the lowest priority. To vehicle. Uconnect® Phone recognizing their voice com- “select” or “delete” a paired phone being mands or numbers, the Uconnect® Phone Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile announced, press the button and say Voice Training feature may be used. To enter Phones “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two this training mode, follow one of the two follow- sections for an alternate way to “select” or • Press the button to begin. ing procedures: “delete” a paired phone. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., Select Another Mobile Phone beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.” from radio mode) This feature allows you to select and start using • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow • Press and hold the button for five sec- another phone paired with the Uconnect® the prompts. onds until the session begins, or, Phone. • You can also press the button at any • Press the button and say the “Voice • button to begin. Press the time while the list is being played, and then Training”, “System Training”, “Start Voice • After the “Ready” prompt and the following choose the phone you wish to delete. Training”command. beep, say “Setup Select Phone” and follow Repeat the words and phrases when prompted the prompts. Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the • You can also press the button at any time Voice Training session should be completed while the list is being played, and then Uconnect® Phone Tutorial when the vehicle is parked with the engine choose the phone that you wish to select. To hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect® Phone running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • features, press the button and say switched OFF. The selected phone will be used for the next “Uconnect® Tutorial.” phone call. If the selected phone is not This procedure may be repeated with a new available, the Uconnect® Phone will return to user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

79 To restore the Voice Command system to fac- • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • It is not recommended to store similar sound- tory default settings, enter the Voice Training • low road noise, ing names in the Uconnect® Phonebook. session via the above procedure and follow the • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® prompts. • smooth road surface, Phone Local) name recognition rate is opti- Voice Command • fully closed windows, mized when the entries are not similar. • For best performance, adjust the rearview • dry weather condition. • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. mirror to provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap • Even though the system is designed for “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not between the overhead console (if equipped) users speaking in European English, Dutch, “eight hundred.” and the mirror. French, German, Italian, or Spanish accents, • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • Always wait for the beep before speaking. the system may not always work for some. • Even though international dialing for most • Speak normally without pausing, just as you • When navigating through an automated sys- number combinations is supported, some would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ tem such as voice mail, or when sending a shortcut dialing number combinations may meters away from you. page, at the end of speaking the digit string, not be supported. make sure to say “Send.” • Make sure that no one other than you is • In a convertible vehicle, system performance speaking during a Voice Command period. • Storing names in the phonebook when the may be compromised with the convertible top vehicle is not in motion is recommended. • Performance is maximized under: down. • low-to-medium blower setting,

80 Phone Far End Audio Performance Bluetooth® Communication Link • Audio quality is maximized under: Mobile phones have been found to lose connec- tion to the Uconnect® Phone. When this hap- • low-to-medium blower setting, pens, the connection can generally be reestab- • low-to-medium vehicle speed, lished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in • low road noise, Bluetooth® ON mode. • smooth road surface, Power-Up • fully closed windows, After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a lan- • dry weather conditions, and guage change, you must wait at least fifteen • operation from the driver seat. seconds prior to using the system. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect® Phone. • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

81 82 83 84 Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) cancel Italian Italiano zero confirmation confirmation language one prompts list names two continue list phones three delete main menu return to main menu four dial mobile five download mute six Dutch Netherlands mute off seven edit new entry eight emergency no nine English other asterisk (*) star delete all erase all pair a phone plus (+) Espanol phone pairing pairing hash (#) Francais phonebook phone book all all of them German Deutsch previous Breakdown service help redial call home select phone select

85 Primary Alternate (s) NOTE: NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface If you do not say a command within a few send System as calmly and normally as possible. seconds, the system will present you with a set up phone settings or The ability of the Voice Interface System to list of options. phone set up recognize user voice commands may be If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it transfer call negatively affected by rapid speaking or a lists options, press the Voice Command raised voice level. Uconnect® Tutorial button, listen for the beep, and say your command. voice training WARNING! Pressing the Voice Command button while work Any voice commanded system should be the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” yes used only in safe driving conditions following The system will be interrupted, and after the all applicable laws, including laws regarding beep, you can add or change commands. This phone use. Your attention should be focused will become helpful once you start to learn the VOICE COMMAND — IF options. EQUIPPED on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious NOTE: Voice Command System Operation injury or death. At any time, you can say the words “Can- cel,” “Help” or “Main Menu.” The Uconnect® Voice Command sys- When you press the Voice Command but- These commands are universal and can be tem allows you to control your AM, ton, you will hear a beep. The beep is your used from any menu. All other commands can FM radio, disc player, USB Mass signal to give a command. be used depending upon the active application. Storage Class device, iPod® family of When using this system, you should speak devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio clearly and at a normal speaking volume. device, and a memo recorder.

86 The system will best recognize your speech if Main Menu • “Previous Station” (to select the previous the windows are closed, and the heater/air Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Com- station) conditioning fan is set to low. mand button. You may say “Main Menu” to • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) switch to the main menu. At any point, if the system does not recognize • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) one of your commands, you will be prompted to In this mode, you can say the following com- repeat it. mands: Radio FM • To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode) FM.” In this mode, you may say the following button and say “Help” or “Main Command • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode) commands: Menu.” • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) Commands • “USB” (to switch to USB mode) • “Next Station” (to select the next station) The Voice Command system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth® • “Previous Station” (to select the previous available at all times. Local commands are Streaming mode) station) available if the supported radio mode is active. • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) Changing The Volume • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Com- Radio AM (Or Radio Long Wave Or Radio Disc Mode mand button. Medium Wave — If Equipped) To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio mode, you may say the following commands: AM.” In this mode, you may say the following • “Track” (#) (to change the track) 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to commands: adjust the volume to a comfortable level while • “Next Track” (to play the next track) the Voice Command system is speaking. • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) Please note the volume setting for Voice Com- • “Next Station” (to select the next station) mand is different than the audio system. • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) 87 USB Mode Voice Command button to stop record- • “Switch to system setup” To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this ing. You proceed by saying one of the follow- • “Change to setup” mode, you may say the following commands: ing commands: • “Main menu setup” or • “Next Track” (to play the next track) – “Save” (to save the memo) • “Switch to setup” • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) – “Continue” (to continue recording) In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, – “Delete” (to delete the recording) mands: Album Name, Track Name, etc.) • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded • “Language English” Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode memos) — During the playback you may • To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, press the Voice Command button to “Language French” say “Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you stop playing memos. You proceed by saying • “Language Spanish” may say the following commands: one of the following commands: • “Language Dutch” • “Next Track” (to play the next track) • “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language Deutsch” • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language Italian” • “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, • “Previous” (to play the previous memo) etc.) • “Tutorial” • “Delete” (to delete a memo) Memo Mode • “Voice Training” • “Delete All” (to delete all memos) To switch to the voice recorder mode, say NOTE: “Memo.” In this mode, you may say the follow- System Setup Keep in mind that you have to press the ing commands: To switch to system setup, you may say one of Voice Command button first and wait • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — the following: for the beep before speaking the “Barge In” During the recording, you may press the • “Change to system setup” commands. • “Main menu system setup”

88 Voice Training WARNING! For users experiencing difficulty with the system • recognizing their voice commands or numbers It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, the Uconnect® Voice “Voice Training” feature inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, may be used. people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 1. Press the Voice Command button, say • “System Setup” and once you are in that menu Do not allow people to ride in any area of then say “Voice Training.” This will train your your vehicle that is not equipped with seats own voice to the system and will improve rec- and seat belts. In a collision, people riding ognition. in these areas are more likely to be seri- 2. Repeat the words and phrases when ously injured or killed. Manual Seat Adjustment prompted by Uconnect® Voice. For best results, • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a the Voice Training session should be completed seat and using a seat belt properly. WARNING! when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all • Adjusting a seat while driving may be windows closed, and the blower fan switched Front Seat Adjustment dangerous. Moving a seat while driving off. This procedure may be repeated with a new could result in loss of control which could user. The system will adapt to the last trained The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward cause a collision and serious injury or voice only. by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, death. • SEATS lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion Seats should be adjusted before fastening and move the seat forward or rearward. Re- the seat belts and while the vehicle is Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint Sys- lease the bar once you have reached the de- parked. Serious injury or death could result tem of the vehicle. sired position. Then, using body pressure, move from a poorly adjusted seat belt. forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

89 Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Equipped Two-Door Models The driver’s seat height can be raised or low- Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear ered by using the ratcheting handle, located on of the vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward. the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat; push downward on the handle to lower the seat.

Recline Lever

WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against Easy Entry Lever your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in Seat Height Adjustment serious injury or death. Front Seatback Recline Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to the desired position and release the handle. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position.

90 Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the Models instrument panel. This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear seats. Driver’s Seat Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback to its full forward position.

Easy Entry Seat To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the seatback upright until it locks and push the seat Tip n’ Slide rearward until the track locks. Passenger Seat NOTE: In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger seat is also equipped with Tip n’ Slide. This • The front passenger seats have a track feature allows for easier entry for rear passen- memory, which returns the seat to just gers. past the halfway point of the track regard- Recline Lever less of its original position. • The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic return- ing of the seat to its sitting position.

91 Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat entire seat forward (Easy Entry). settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heat- Tip n’ Slide ing elements OFF. When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the Heated Seats — If Equipped Easy Entry Lever heater will provide a boosted heat level during On some models, the front driver and passen- the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat With the seat forward, pull the entire seat as- ger seats may be equipped with heaters in both output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If the sembly toward the instrument panel. the seat cushions and seatbacks. HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will There are two heated seat switches that allow automatically switch to LOW-level after approxi- the driver and passenger to operate the seats mately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At independently. The controls for each seat are that time, the number of illuminated LEDs located on a switch bank near the bottom center changes from two to one, indicating the change. of the instrument panel. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automati- cally after approximately 30 minutes.

92 NOTE: Head Restraints Front Head Restraints When a heat setting is selected, heat will be Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the felt within two to five minutes. of injury by restricting head movement in the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, event of a rear impact. Head restraints should press the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint, and push downward WARNING! be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. on the head restraint. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic WARNING! illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi- cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other The head restraints for all occupants must be physical condition must exercise care properly adjusted prior to operating the ve- when using the seat heater. It may cause hicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints burns even at low temperatures, especially should never be adjusted while the vehicle is if used for long periods of time. in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head • Do not place anything on the seat or restraints improperly adjusted or removed seatback that insulates against heat, such could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. as a blanket or cushion. This may cause Adjustment Button the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could Rear Head Restraints The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable cause serious burns due to the increased head restraints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” surface temperature of the seat. in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Ve- hicle” for information on child seat tether rout- ing.

93 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — 2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward. Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models Two-Door Models NOTE: WARNING! • Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be • necessary to reposition the front seats. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a • Be sure that the front seats are fully collision, people riding in these areas are upright and positioned forward. This will more likely to be seriously injured or killed. allow the rear seat to fold down easily. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of 1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the your vehicle that is not equipped with seats seatback forward. and seat belts. Folding Rear Seat • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a 3. Return the seat to the normal position. seat and using a seat belt properly. 4. Raise the rear seatback using the assist • In a collision, you or others in your vehicle strap and firmly lock the seat into position. could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats are fully latched.

1. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 and 2 under “Fold And Tumble Rear Seat” in this section. Rear Seat Release

94 2. Press down on the release bar on each side, WARNING! NOTE: and pull the seat out and away from the lower • bracket. • To help protect against personal injury, Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be passengers should not be seated in the necessary to reposition the front seat to 3. Remove the seat from the vehicle. rear cargo area with the rear seat folded its mid-track position. down or removed from the vehicle. • Be sure that the front seats are fully • The rear cargo space is intended for load upright and positioned forward. This will carrying purposes only, not for passengers allow the rear seat to fold down easily. who should sit in seats and use seat belts. WARNING! • 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo Four-Door Models area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a To provide additional storage area, each rear collision, people riding in these areas are seat can be folded flat to allow for extended more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Release Bar Location cargo space and still maintain some rear seat- Do not allow people to ride in any area of ing room. your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Replacing The Rear Seat — and seat belts. Two-Door Models • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a Reverse the steps for removing the seat. seat and using a seat belt properly.

95 To Fold Down The Rear Seat To Raise The Rear Seat TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If seat), and lift it upward until the seatback re- interference from the cargo area prevents the HOOD leases. seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi- Release both the hood latches. culty returning the seat to its proper position. NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use. If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make sure your seat- back is fully latched.

WARNING! Be certain that the seatback is securely Hood Latch Release Levers locked into position. If the seatback in not Slowly fold down the seatback. securely locked into position the seat will not Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, provide the proper stability for child seats located in the middle of the hood opening. Push and/or passengers. An improperly latched the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle, to seat could cause serious injury. open the hood. You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.

96 To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.

WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious Multifunction Lever Headlight Switch injury or death. Headlights And Position Lights Automatic Headlights — If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first This system automatically turns the headlights detent for position lights and instrument panel on or off according to ambient light levels. To LIGHTS lights. Turn to the second detent for headlight turn the system on, turn the end of the multi- operation. function lever to the AUTO position (third de- Multifunction Lever NOTE: tent). When the system is on, the Headlight The multifunction lever controls the operation of Time Delay feature is also on. This means the Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- the position lights, headlights, headlight beam headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after spheric conditions. This will usually clear as selection, passing lights (flash-to-pass), fog you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- atmospheric conditions change to allow the lights (if equipped), instrument panel light dim- tion. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the condensation to change back into a vapor. ming and turn signals. The lever is located on end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the left side of the steering column. position. the clearing process.

97 The Headlights with Wipers feature can be NOTE: turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle • Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer If either light remains on and does not to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in check for a defective outside light bulb. If “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur- an indicator fails to light when the lever is ther information. moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. Turn Signals • A tone will chime if the turn signals are Move the multifunction lever up or down and the left on for more than 1 mile (2 km). arrows on each side of the instrument cluster Headlight Switch flash to show proper operation of the front and Lane Change Assist rear turn signal lights. Tap the lever up or down once, without moving NOTE: beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or The engine must be running before the left) will flash three times then automatically turn headlights will turn on in the Automatic off. mode. Lights-On Reminder Headlights With Wipers (Available If the headlights or parking lights are on after the With Automatic Headlights Only) ignition is turned OFF, the high beam indicator When this feature is active, the headlights will light will remain illuminated and a chime will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the sound when the driver’s door is opened. wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are Turn Signal Operation turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

98 High/Low Beam Switch Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to Push the multifunction lever away from you to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting. switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the To activate the rear fog lights, turn on lever toward you to switch the headlights back the front position lights or headlights, to low beam. pull out the end of the multifunction lever and rotate the lever to the last Front Fog Lights — If Equipped detent.

The front fog light switch is in the multi- NOTE: function lever. To activate the front fog The headlights will always be on when the lights, turn on the position lights or head- rear fog lamps are activated. lights and pull out the end of the lever. Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the Dimmer Control extreme bottom position to fully dim the instru- ment panel lights and prevent the interior lights Interior Lights from illuminating when a door is opened. The overhead light will come on when a door is Rotate the center portion of the lever up to opened. It may also be turned on by rotating the increase the brightness of the instrument panel control for the dimmer switch on the multifunc- lights when the parking lights or headlights are tion lever fully upward. on. The overhead light will automatically turn off in Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open the next detent position to brighten the odom- or the dimmer control is left in the dome light Front Fog Light Switch eter and radio when the parking lights or head- position. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore lights are on. the overhead light operation.

99 Cargo Lamp The rear cargo light may be turned on by Headlight Leveling System — If The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time Equipped the front doors are opened, by rotating the to turn the light off. This system allows the driver to maintain proper control for the dimmer switch on the multifunc- headlight beam position with the road surface tion lever fully upward, or if equipped, when the regardless of vehicle load. The headlight level- UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote ing switch is located on the lower switch bank Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. (below the climate controls). The sports bar reading lights (available on To operate: With the low beams on, four-door models) can be turned on by pressing push the upper side or lower side the switches, located on either side of the lens. of the headlight leveling switch until Press a switch a second time to turn the light off. the appropriate number, which cor- responds to the load listed on the following chart, illuminates on the switch. Rear Cargo Light NOTE: Headlight Leveling will not activate when the When a door is open and the interior lights are parking lights or high beam headlights are on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme on. bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as the “Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery. Sports Bar Reading Light

100 0 Driver only, or driver and front passenger. 1 All seating positions occupied. 2 All seating positions occupied, plus an evenly distributed load in the lug- gage compartment. The total weight of passengers and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle. 3 Driver, plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compartment. The total weight of the driver and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle. Calculations based on a passenger weight of 165 lbs (75 kg).

101 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION! (Continued) WASHERS Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed the wiper switch is left on and the wipers The windshield wiper/washer control lever is wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever freeze to the windshield, damage to the located on the right side of the steering column. upward to the third detent past the intermittent wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is The front wipers are operated by rotating a settings for high-speed wiper operation. restarted. switch, located at the end of the lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/ washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in Intermittent Wiper System “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. Use the intermittent wiper when weather condi- tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent settings. The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.

Front Wiper Control

CAUTION! Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine. If

(Continued) Front Wiper Control 102 NOTE: WARNING! The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than Sudden loss of visibility through the wind- 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be shield could lead to a collision. You might not doubled. see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during Windshield Washers freezing weather, warm the windshield with To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and defroster before and during windshield hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled washer use. while in the delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the Mist Feature Mist Control intermittent interval previously selected. Push down on the wiper lever to activate a TILT STEERING COLUMN single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the This feature allows you to tilt the steering col- passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles umn upward or downward. The tilt lever is down, the wipers will continue to operate. and then turn off. located on the steering column, below the turn NOTE: signal lever. The mist feature does not activate the Push down on the lever to unlock the steering washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will column. With one hand firmly on the steering be sprayed on the windshield. The wash wheel, move the steering column up or down, function must be used in order to spray the as desired. Pull upwards on the lever to lock the windshield with washer fluid. column firmly in place.

103 ELECTRONIC SPEED NOTE: CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control designed to shut down if multiple Speed takes over accelerator operations at speeds Control functions are operated at the same greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo- Control System can be reactivated by push- cated on the right side of the steering wheel. ing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. Tilt Steering Column Lever To Activate Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator WARNING! Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To Do not adjust the steering column while turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a driving. Adjusting the steering column while second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn driving or driving with the steering column off. The system should be turned off when not in use. unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Electronic Speed Control Buttons WARNING! 1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + Leaving the Electronic Speed Control sys- 4 — CANCEL 3 — SET - tem on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose

(Continued) 104 Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a WARNING! (Continued) To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the 1 mph (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each control and have an accident. Always leave RES (+) button and release. Resume can be subsequent tap of the button results in a de- the system OFF when you are not using it. used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). crease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing To Set A Desired Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you Press the accelerator as you would normally. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) When the pedal is released, the vehicle will the vehicle has reached the desired speed, button. If the button is continually pressed, the return to the set speed. press the SET (-) button and release. Release set speed will continue to increase until the Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at button is released, then the new set speed will the selected speed. The transmission may downshift on hills to be established. maintain the vehicle set speed. NOTE: Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a The vehicle should be traveling at a steady NOTE: 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each The Electronic Speed Control system main- speed and on level ground before pressing subsequent tap of the button results in an the SET (-) button. tains speed up and down hills. A slight increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). speed change on moderate hills is normal. To Deactivate To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the occur so it may be preferable to drive without CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure button is continually held in the SET (-) position, Electronic Speed Control. while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the the set speed will continue to decrease until the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the button is released. Release the button when the set speed memory. desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

105 WARNING! A second power outlet is located inside the center console and is powered directly from the Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous vehicle battery. where the system cannot maintain a con- stant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast CAUTION! for the conditions, and you could lose control • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slip- the fuse protecting the system will need to pery. be replaced. Front Power Outlet • Power outlets are designed for accessory ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET When the optional cigar lighter heating element plugs only. Do not insert any other object in is used in the power outlet, it heats when There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power the power outlets as this will damage the pushed in and pops out automatically when outlets that can provide power for accessories outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of ready for use. To preserve the heating ele- designed for use with the standard power outlet the power outlet can cause damage not ment, do not hold the lighter in the heating adapters. covered by your New Vehicle Limited War- position. The front power outlet is powered from the ranty. ignition switch. Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

106 On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, WARNING! (Continued) there is a third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION! Power Outlet Fuse Locations • Many accessories that can be plugged in 1—M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin draw power from the vehicle’s battery, 2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instru- even when not in use (i.e., mobile phones, Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped ment Panel etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, 3 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi- Sub Woofer (Opt.) ciently to degrade battery life and/or pre- vent the engine from starting. • WARNING! Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will To avoid serious injury or death: degrade the battery even more quickly. • Only devices designed for use in this type Only use these intermittently and with of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt greater caution. outlet. (Continued) (Continued)

107 CAUTION! (Continued) CUPHOLDERS Rear Cupholders The rear cupholders are located on the back of • After the use of high-power draw accesso- Front Cupholders the center console. ries, or long periods of the vehicle not The front cupholders are located in the center being started (with accessories still console. plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alter- nator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces- sory or accessory bracket from the plug.

Rear Cupholders

Front Cupholders STORAGE Glovebox Storage The lockable glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the lower instrument panel. Pull outward on the handle/ latch to open the compartment.

108 Console Storage Compartment 3. Open the rear compartment cover. To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment, press the latch and lift the cover.

Center Console Lid Storage Rear Storage Compartment Rear Storage Cover The rear cargo area storage compartment DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR cover is held by a spring-loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage compartment cover, MODELS — IF EQUIPPED Center Console use the following procedure: If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must remove one of the tops from the ve- There is an extra storage area underneath the NOTE: hicle. If the soft top is removed, the pivot console lid. The console lid has an integrated The rear storage compartment latch should paper clip feature that can hold small items. brackets must also be removed from the not be used as cargo tie-down. sport bar. The soft top was installed at the 1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top (straight up) to the top surface of the tray. and the hard top are to be used indepen- dently. Removal is mandatory to prevent any 2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, possible wear and tear on the soft top. Your so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray. vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting

109 from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time. Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models 1. Locate and remove the two boxes that con- tain the following items: • Right and left door frames • Four door frame attachment knobs • Right and left quarter windows • Rear window 4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and 5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to right metal pivot brackets. Remove the soft top expose the pivot brackets. Remove the brack- • Two rear window roll up straps from the vehicle and store in a clean, dry ets using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Recover • Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped) location. and re-zip the sports bar cover. Store the pivot • Two rear swing gate brackets NOTE: brackets and screws in a safe place. 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you 6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear may carefully tap on the knuckles using a Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/ Panel Removal” in this section. rubber mallet. Rear Panel Installation” in this section. 3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx® head driver.

110 Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door 4. If the soft top has been removed, follow Models these steps to reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle, proceed to step #5. NOTE: The following procedures are for first time a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, set up only. For future soft top procedures, unzip the sport bar covers and attach the refer to “Soft Top” in this section. pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a 1. Locate and remove the following items prior #T30 Torx® head driver. Re-cover and to hard top removal: re-zip the sport bar covers. • Right and left door frames b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the • Door frame attachment knobs (four for vehicle with the bows pointing forward d. Screw the pivot screws back into place two-door models, six for four-door models) and the curved portion of the bows facing using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Secure • Right and left quarter windows upward. them until they are snug, being careful • Rear window c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal not to cross-thread the screws or over- tighten. 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top pivot brackets. Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear NOTE: Panel Removal” in this section. To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may 3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber Frame” in this section. mallet.

111 • Rear window CAUTION! DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR • Two rear window roll up straps Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip MODELS — IF EQUIPPED • the screws if they are overtightened. If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped) must remove one of the tops from the ve- • Two rear swing gate brackets 5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar hicle. If the soft top is removed, the pivot 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top for bottom of rear window) and set aside. brackets must also be removed from the Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear sport bar. The soft top was installed at the Panel Removal” in this section. NOTE: factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top Be sure the wire harness in the left rear and the hard top are to be used indepen- 3. Unbutton the side bow tether strap (both corner is not tangled in the soft top bows dently. Removal is mandatory to prevent any sides). before you lift the top. possible wear and tear on the soft top. Your 6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting This cover should be discarded. It was intended from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the as a protective cover for shipping only. same time for extended periods of time. NOTE: Removing The Soft Top — A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the Four-Door Models dual top wrap. 1. Locate and remove the two boxes that con- 7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — tain the following items: Putting Up The Soft Top” in this section. • Right and left door frames • Six door frame attachment knobs • Right and left quarter windows

112 4. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle, 5. The tether strap must be hooked onto the 6. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot slide the tether strap up the side bow (both pivot bracket prior to removal of soft top from bracket bolts (two per side) from the sport bar sides). vehicle (both sides). using a 10.0 mm wrench or socket driver. 7. Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the pivot bracket from the sport bar bracket.

113 8. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door 4. Install the soft top with the pivot brackets store in a clean, dry location (another person Models above the sport bar brackets, lower the soft top may be needed to help with this operation). into the sport bar bracket slots in a downward NOTE: NOTE: motion to lock tab on soft top. You will need to lift The following procedures are for first time the top to get the brackets to line up. (Another If you are doing this alone, use one arm to set up only. For future soft top procedures, person may be needed to help with this opera- hold the bundle up, the other to remove the refer to “Soft Top” in this section. tion.) brackets. 1. Locate and remove the following items prior NOTE: to hard top removal: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to • Right and left door frames hold the soft top up, the other to align the • Six door frame attachment knobs brackets. • Right and left quarter windows • Rear window 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal” in this section. 3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door 9. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Frame” in this section. Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/ Rear Panel Installation” in this section.

114 5. Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar CAUTION! 8. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle bracket mounting tab in a downward motion to remove the tether strap from the bracket hook lock into tab. Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip by sliding strap up off hook and slide down the the screws if they are overtightened. side bow (both sides).

7. Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket.

6. Install the pivot bracket bolts back into place using a 10.0 mm wrench or socket driver. Secure them until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.

115 9. Button the side bow tether strap (both sides). 12. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — CAUTION! Putting Up The Soft Top” in this section. Failure to follow these cautions may cause FREEDOM TOP™ interior water damage, stains or mildew: • THREE-PIECE MODULAR It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal. Removing HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow CAUTION! water to drip into the vehicles interior. • • The hard top is not designed to carry any The hard top assembly must be positioned additional loads such as roof racks, spare properly to ensure sealing. Improper in- stallation can cause water to leak into the 10. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal tires, building, hunting, or camping sup- plies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not vehicles interior. bar for bottom of rear window) and set aside. • designed as a structural member of the Careless handling and storage of the re- NOTE: vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry movable roof panels may damage the Be sure the wire harness in the left rear any additional loads other than environ- seals, causing water to leak into the ve- corner is not tangled in the soft top bows mental (rain, snow, etc.). hicles interior. before you lift the top. • • Do not move your vehicle until the top has The front panel(s) must be positioned 11. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. been either fully attached to the windshield properly to ensure sealing. Improper in- This cover should be discarded. It was intended frame and body side, or fully removed. stallation can cause water to leak into the as a protective cover for shipping only. vehicles interior. NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap.

116 Front Panel(s) Removal 3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from 5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the the center of the roof panel. top of the windshield. NOTE: Left panel must be removed before remov- ing right panel. 1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side. 2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on the overhead speaker bar assembly) counter- clockwise until they can be removed.

4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above 6. Remove the left-hand panel. the shoulder belt anchorage). To remove the right panel, follow the steps above except for Step 3.

117 Freedom Top™ Storage Bag Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top™ Modu- with the latches facing upward. lar Hard Top, come with a Freedom Top™ NOTE: storage bag that allows you to store your Free- Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is dom Top™ panels. The storage bag contains closed prior to inserting the panel into the two compartments and fits behind the rear seat. bag. Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are facing downward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap. Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and fold it back. NOTE: Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the di- Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latch vider is laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located at is closed prior to inserting the panel into the the center of the divider. Freedom bag. Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing downward.

118 Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the closed. hooks and straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages, located at the base of the rear seat.

Front Panel(s) Installation NOTE: Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of Set the panels on the windshield frame so the bag) through the loops. that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the Wrap the upper strap around the rear head body. restraints and loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bag 1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel. securely against the rear seat. 2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal in reverse order.

119 Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear NOTE: 4. Remove the six Torx® head screws that Hard Top Removed The front panel(s) must be positioned prop- secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the erly to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the interior bodyside) using a #40 Torx® head 1. Turn the left and right panels over and move windshield frame so that there is no over- driver. the spacer block (located on the rear of the hang. Also, make sure that the panels are panel) upward 90 degrees. 5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure sitting flush with the body. clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the rear 2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel. window glass. 3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal in reverse order. Rear Hard Top Removal 1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s) Removal” in this section. 2. Open both doors. 3. Remove the two Torx® head screws that secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using a #40 Torx® head driver (Four–Door Only).

120 6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear 7. Release the red locking tab by pulling out- 8. To remove the wiring harness press the tab inside corner of the vehicle. ward to the right. and pull downward to disconnect.

Wire Harness Connector Red Locking Tab Press Tab To Disconnect

121 9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips Rear Hard Top Installation DOOR FRAME on hose connector and pull downward. NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top CAUTION! usage, they must be removed prior to instal- Failure to follow these cautions may cause lation of the hard top. interior water damage, stains or mildew: 1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and • Opening a door or lowering a window while replace if necessary. the top is wet may allow water to drip into 2. Install the hard top using the same steps for the vehicle’s interior. removal in reverse order. • Careless handling and storage of the re- Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with movable door frame(s) may damage the the body at the sides and check to ensure that seals, causing water to leak into the vehi- Pinch Grip On Hose there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and cle’s interior. hard top. • The door frame(s) must be positioned 10. Close the swing gate. NOTE: properly to ensure sealing. Improper in- 11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. stallation can cause water to leak into the • Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent The Torx™ fasteners that attach the hard vehicle’s interior. damage. top to the body should be torqued to 88 in lb +/- 22 in lb (10 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m). CAUTION! • It is not necessary to pinch connection The removal of the Freedom Top requires four when reinstalling washer hose. Push on adults located on each corner. Failure to follow until click is heard. this caution could damage the Freedom Top.

122 WARNING! Door Frame Removal 2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame. • Do not drive your vehicle on public roads 1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attach- with the door frame(s) removed as you will ment knobs (two per door). 3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle. lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only. • Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This pro- cedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

WARNING! Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used.

123 4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame 3. After the door frame pin has been set into WARNING! (Continued) and fold for storage. Store in a secure location. the body side hole, carefully set the front of the • Do not drive your vehicle on public roads door frame into the rubber seal at the top of the with the doors removed as you will lose the windshield. protection that they can provide. This pro- 4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip cedure is furnished for use during off-road it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear, operation only. making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame. Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models-If Equipped 1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumb- screws. 2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of WARNING! the body side, behind the door opening. • Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

(Continued)

124 5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and Door Frame Installation — 3. Position the top of the door frame against the tighten both knobs. Repeat on the other side. Four-Door Models-If Equipped metal sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to pinch the material of the 1. Install the rear door frame first. sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly 2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of positioned on the seal above the front of the the body side, just behind the rear door open- rear door. ing.

125 4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to 6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar 8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the hold the door rail in position. making sure that the material for the side bar front knob (long knob). Then, install the middle 5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame cover is not pinched by the door frame. knob (short knob) through the front and rear in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield. 7. Position the rear of the front door frame to door frames and screw into the top of the lay on top of the front of the rear door frame. B-pillar. Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid 9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most water leaks. knob, and then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the other side.

126 SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily CAUTION! (Continued) on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its MODELS original size and the top can then be installed. If • Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Please visit the owners section of Jeep.com the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for for instructional videos. not attempt to put the top down or roll the further information. It contains important rear or side curtains. information on cleaning and caring for your CAUTION! vehicle’s fabric top. The soft top is not designed to carry any CAUTION! • Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to additional loads such as roof racks, spare • Do not run a fabric top through an auto- pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, matic car wash. Window scratches and retainers securing the soft top. Do not force and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not de- wax build up may result. or pry the soft top framework when opening signed as a structural member of the vehicle • Do not lower the top when the temperature or closing. Damage to the top may result. and, thus, cannot properly carry any addi- is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top tional loads other than environmental (rain, may result. snow, etc.). • Do not move your vehicle until the top has WARNING! been either fully attached to the windshield • Do not drive the vehicle with the rear If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or frame, or fully lowered. window curtain up unless the side curtains the top has been folded down for a period of • Do not lower the top with the windows in- are also removed. Dangerous exhaust time, the top will appear to have shrunk when stalled. Window and top damage may occur. gases could enter the vehicle causing you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is harm to the driver and passengers. caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl (Continued) coating on the fabric top. (Continued)

127 2. Remove the back window. WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • The fabric upper doors and fabric top are • The soft top must be positioned properly to designed only for protection against the ensure sealing. Improper installation can elements. Do not rely on them to contain cause water to leak into the vehicle’s inte- occupants within the vehicle or to protect rior. against injury during an accident. Remem- ber, always wear seat belts. Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top Refer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this section CAUTION! for further information. Failure to follow these cautions may cause 1. Remove the side windows. 3. Release header latches from the windshield interior water damage, stains or mildew on frame. the top material: • It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. • Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)

128 4. Release the sail panel retainers from the 5. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail 7. Open the swing gate and lower the top. panels so that they rest on top of the soft top. body side channel at the rear corners of the NOTE: vehicle. Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle.

6. Release the Sunrider® latch (both sides). NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

129 Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top 3. Install rear corner panels. Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this section for further information. 1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the Sunrider® latches (another per- son may be needed to help with this operation).

2. Engage header latches. 4. Install the back window.

130 5. Install the side windows. 7. Insert the front retainer of the window into 6. To install the side windows, affix the window the door channel, making sure the retainer is temporarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the fully seated and properly positioned on the door rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about frame. Failure to do so can result in wind and 1 in (2.5 cm). water leaks or damage to the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion 2 — Correct Insertion

131 8. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel, begin- ning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the opposite side.

132 Lowering The Soft Top

1 — Header Bow 6 — Quarter Window 2 — 2–Bow 7 — Check Strap 3 — 3–Bow 8 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window 4 — Sail Panel 9 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window 5 — Body Side Retainer

133 1 — Zipper Start 2 — Zipper Finish 3 — Swing Gate Bar 4 — Swing Gate Brackets 5 — Sail Panels

134 NOTE: 2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. 4. Open the swing gate. Clean side and rear windows before removal 3. Release the header latches and leave the 5. Before unzipping the rear window, release to assist in preventing scratching during hooks in the loops on the windshield. the first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them it straight rearward out of the swing gate brack- with a mild soap solution and a small brush. ets. Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer. 1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door window by opening the door and lifting the half-door window out. NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully out- side of the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.

135 • Unzip the rear window starting at the right 6. Remove the rear window retainer from the 7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch- lower corner of the window. Pull the zipper swing gate bracket on both the left and right ing. up, across the top and down to the left sides. 8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the top lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on and rear edge of the side window. the rear window. Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on 9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, com- the top cover. pletely unzip the window.

136 10. Once unzipped, remove the side window 12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail 13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be retainers from the door channel and body side panels so that they rest on top of the soft top. removed unless the hard top is being installed. channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side. To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the 11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to from the body side channel at the rear corners disengage. of the vehicle.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

137 14. Completely release the latches from the 15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rear- 16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails loops on the windshield frame. If your vehicle ward over the Sunrider® link (Sunrider® Models (Sunrider® Models only). is not equipped with the Sunrider® package, only). proceed to Step 15.

138 17. Before lowering the top, open the swing 18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps be- Raising The Soft Top gate to prevent possible damage to the rear tween the bows and as far inward as possible. 1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. center high-mounted brake light. Move to the This will keep any portion of the top from front of the vehicle. Grasp the side bow behind flapping outside of the vehicle. 2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to the header and lift the top, folding it toward the “Door Frame” in this section for further informa- rear of the vehicle. tion. NOTE: 3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Help from another person will ease this Sunrider® link (Sunrider® Models only). operation.

19. Close the front header latches. 20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door Frame” in this section for further infor- mation.

139 4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the 5. Make sure the Sunrider® bracket on the side 6. Open the header latches and engage the top by the side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow) bows latches to the door rails (Sunrider® Mod- hook on each side onto the windshield loops (do up and over the sports bar until the header rests els only). not close the latches). on the top of the windshield frame.

140 7. If the swing gate brackets were removed, 8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently 9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into install them by hooking the rear edge of the pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow. the body side channel, leaving the last 3 in bracket on the interior side of the body channel. (7.6 cm) toward the rear window loose (on both Then, rotate it rearward and over the channel sides). Pulling down on the rear roof bow until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail. To (3–bow) will aid to reach the channel with the be properly located, the bracket must only be retainers. clipped to the shortened rail edge.

141 10. To install the side windows, affix the win- 11. Insert the front retainer of the window into dow temporarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the door channel, making sure the retainer is the rear corner. Start the zipper but close only fully seated and properly positioned on the door about 1 in (2.5 cm). frame. Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion 2 — Correct Insertion

142 12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of 14. Install the rear window by starting both the window into the bottom side channel, begin- zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear ning at the front and working to the rear of the window opening. Ensure that the zippers are vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper completely properly started and aligned before zipping to and attaching the Velcro® along the top and prevent damage. rear of the window. Repeat this step for the opposite side.

13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window. The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed.

143 15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side 17. Insert the rear window retainer into the 18. Apply downward pressure on the top cor- of the window. swing gate bracket on both the left and right ner of the rear soft top bow (3–bow), then 16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it sides. complete attaching the sail panel retainers into into the swing gate brackets. the body side channel. 19. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position.

144 SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily CAUTION! (Continued) on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its MODELS original size and the top can then be snapped • Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Please visit the owner’s section of Jeep.com into place. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for for instructional videos. below, do not attempt to put the top down or further information. It contains important roll the rear or side curtains. information on cleaning and caring for your CAUTION! vehicle’s fabric top. The soft top is not designed to carry any CAUTION! • Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to additional loads such as roof racks, spare • Do not run a fabric top through an auto- pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, matic car wash. Window scratches and retainers securing the soft top. Do not and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not de- wax buildup may result. force or pry the soft top framework when signed as a structural member of the vehicle, • Do not lower the top when the temperature opening or closing. Damage to the top may and thus cannot properly carry any additional is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top result. loads other than environmental (rain, snow, may result. etc.). • Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty. Grit may scratch the window. WARNING! If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or • Do not move your vehicle until the top has • Do not drive the vehicle with the rear the top has been folded down for a period of been either fully attached to the windshield window curtain up unless the side curtains time, the top will appear to have shrunk when frame, or fully lowered. are also open. Dangerous exhaust gases you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is • Do not lower the top with the windows which can kill could enter the vehicle. caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl installed. Window and top damage may coating on the fabric top. occur. (Continued)

(Continued)

145 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top • The fabric upper doors and fabric top are • The soft top must be positioned properly to designed only for protection against the ensure sealing. Improper installation can 1. Remove the side windows. elements. Do not rely on them to contain cause water to leak into the vehicle’s inte- occupants within the vehicle or to protect rior. against injury during an accident. Remem- ber, always wear seat belts. NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing CAUTION! the hard top. Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. • Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)

146 2. Remove the back window. 3. Release header latches from the windshield NOTE: NOTE: frame. When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is Start zipper from the right side to remove helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow. back window. 5. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top.

4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.

147 6. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to 7. Release Sunrider® latch (both sides). NOTE: the rear. Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle. Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the Sunrider® latches (another per- son may be needed to help with this operation).

8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

148 3. Rotate the header forward. 5. Install the back window.

2. Install rear corner panels. 4. Engage the header latches. 6. Install the side windows.

149 7. To install the side windows, affix the window 8. Insert the front retainer of the window into 9. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of temporarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the the door channel, making sure the retainer is the window into the bottom side channel, begin- rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about fully seated and properly positioned on the door ning at the front and working to the rear of the 1 in (2.5 cm). frame. Failure to do so can result in wind and vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper completely water leaks or damage to the window. and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the opposite side.

1 — Incorrect Insertion 2 — Correct Insertion

150 Folding Down The Soft Top

1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer 2 — 2–Bow 7 — Quarter Window 3 — 3–Bow 8 — Check Strap 4 — 4–Bow 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window 5 — Sail Panel 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

151 1 — Zipper Start 2 — Zipper Finish 3 — Swing Gate Bar 4 — Swing Gate Brackets 5 — Sail Panels

152 NOTE: 2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. 4. Open the swing gate. Clean side and rear windows before removal 3. Release the header latches and hooks from 5. Before unzipping the rear window, release to assist in preventing scratching during the loops on the windshield frame. the first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them it straight rearward out of the swing gate brack- with a mild soap solution and a small brush. ets. Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer. 1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door window by opening the door and lifting the half-door window out. NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.

153 • Unzip the rear window starting at the right 6. Remove the rear window retainer from the 7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch- lower corner of the window. Pull the zipper swing gate bracket on both the left and right ing. up, across the top and down to the left sides. 8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the top lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on and rear edge of the side window. the rear window. Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on 9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, com- the top cover. pletely unzip the window.

154 10. Once unzipped, remove the side window NOTE: 13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be retainers from the door channel and body side When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is removed unless the hard top is being installed. channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side. helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow. To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the 11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers 12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to from the body side channel at the rear corners of the soft top. of the vehicle. disengage.

155 14. Grasp the front side bow behind the 15. Fold back the front section of the top, 16. Fold the top so that the material forms a header, and lift the top. pulling the fabric rearward. Gently rest the "W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the header on top of the rear portion of the deck. material into two folds.

156 17. Release the side bows by pressing down 18. Before lowering the top, open the swing 19. Gently slide the side bows off the door on the latch above the front of the rear door. gate to prevent possible damage to the rear frame track and lower the top down into the Push the top rearward to disengage. Repeat center high-mounted brake light. Grasp the vehicle. this step on the other side. folded side bows and slide the top along the NOTE: door frame track to the rear door frame. Help from another person will ease this operation.

157 20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps be- Putting Up The Soft Top tween the bows as far inside as possible. This NOTE: will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle. Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting 21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro® scratched. It may be helpful to open the rear straps provided to secure the top to the vehicle doors. by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the body. 1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door Frame” in this section for further informa- tion. 2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the 5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into down position and store in secure location. the door frame tracks and slide the top forward. 3. Open the swing gate. 4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames. NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation. 22. Close the front header latches. 23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door Frame” in this section for further infor- mation.

158 6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider® 7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. 9. Open the header latches and engage the locking mechanisms that are located above the 8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the hook on each side onto the windshield loops (do front of the rear doors. top by the side bow until it rests on the wind- not close the latches). shield frame.

159 10. If the swing gate brackets were removed, 11. Ensure that the straps are positioned cor- install them by hooking the rear edge of the rectly before pulling the sail panels over the rear bracket on the interior side of the body channel. roof bow (4–bow). Then, rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

12. To install the side windows, affix the win- dow temporarily by attaching it to the Velcro® in the upper rear corner. Start the zipper but close Partially install the sail panel retainers into the only about 1 in (2.5 cm). body side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear roof bow (4–bow) will aid in reaching the channel with the retainers.

160 13. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion 2 — Correct Insertion

14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel, begin- ning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the opposite side.

161 15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the 16. Install the rear window by starting both 17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear side of the window. inside of the rear window. The spongy part of window opening. Ensure that the zippers are 18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it the seal should be down and pointed outward to properly started and aligned before zipping to into the swing gate brackets. seal with the swing gate when closed. prevent damage.

162 19. Insert the rear window retainer into the 20. Complete the installation of the sail panel SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR swing gate bracket on both the left and right by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body sides. channel. MODELS) 21. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position. CAUTION! Operating the top, opening a door or lower- ing a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.

163 Opening The Sunrider® 3. Slide the plastic sleeve forward. 4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the material is folded back as shown. 1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. NOTE: 2. Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame. The Sunrider® latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider® use. If acti- vated, the soft top must be reinstalled start- ing from the sail panels.

164 5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. 3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front Opening The Sunrider® Wrap the straps around the bows as shown. of the vehicle. 1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. Repeat on the other side. 4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield frame, close latches, and return the 2. Release the header latches from the loops sun visors to their original positions. on the windshield frame. 5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider® link. SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS)

CAUTION! 6. Reposition the sun visors. Operating the top, opening a door or lower- ing a window while the top is wet may allow Closing The Sunrider® water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. 1. Remove the straps from the side bows. 2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.

165 3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, 4. Fold back the front section of the top and 5. Fold the top so that the material forms a "W" and lift the top. gently rest the header on top of the rear portion as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the of the deck. material into two folds.

166 6. Secure the top by using the two provided FOLDING WINDSHIELD wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off- straps. Each strap will wrap around the side The fold-down windshield and removable side road, regardless of whether the windshield is bow and Velcro® to itself; use one strap on bars on your vehicle are structural elements raised or folded down. each side of the vehicle. that can provide some protection in some acci- Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the dents. The windshield also provides some pro- doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see tection against weather, road debris and intru- your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl- sion of small branches and other objects. mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use. windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protection these structural ele- WARNING! ments can provide. Carefully follow these warnings to help pro- If required for certain off-road uses, the side tect against personal injury: bars can be removed and the windshield folded • Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the down. However, the protection afforded by windshield down. Closing The Sunrider® these features is then lost. If you remove the • Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind- Perform the above steps in the opposite order. side bars and fold down the windshield, drive shield is securely fastened, either up or slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that NOTE: down. the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph • Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow (16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if Eye protection, such as goggles, should the material to sag and may block the rear- you are driving off-road with the windshield be worn at all times when the windshield is view mirror. folded down. down.

Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars (Continued) as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your passenger should 167 NOTE: 6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering. WARNING! (Continued) To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, • 7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible Be sure that you carefully follow the in- mark the original locations prior to remov- structions for raising the windshield. Make through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the ing. side bar, one hex bolt (13 mm) on the side of the sure that the folding windshield, windshield 2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and side bar, and one hex bolt (13 mm) on top of the wipers, side bars, and all associated hard- the one side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through side bar. ware and fasteners are correctly and the trim (Do not remove plastic corner trim, sun NOTE: tightly assembled before driving your ve- visor bolts, or sport bar covering). hicle. Failure to follow these instructions Pull side bar out horizontally when remov- ing. may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents. • If you remove the doors, store them out- side the vehicle. In the event of an acci- dent, a loose door may cause personal injury.

Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars 3. Remove the sun visor. 1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top 4. Remove the A-pillar cap. following the instructions in this manual. 5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with Uconnect® phone).

168 CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) Do not remove the head impact foam from them as described or they may cause per- the side bars, as damage to the foam may sonal injury if an accident occurs. See your result. authorized dealer for the cinch straps.

NOTE: 10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first Store all of the mounting bolts in their origi- pulling the wiper away from the windshield and nal threaded holes and tighten for safekeep- out to the “lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm ing. nut caps, and remove the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center 8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach console or securely behind the rear seat. 12. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the sport bar Velcro® covering. the rubber hood bumpers. NOTE: 9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, It may be necessary to use a battery terminal 13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch use four cinch straps (available from your au- puller tool in order to separate the wiper strap through the footman hoop on the center of thorized dealer). Attach the straps through the arms from the shaft after the nuts have been the hood and on the center of the windshield slots located on the floor behind the folded rear removed. frame. Tighten the strap to secure the wind- seat at the front of the storage bin cover. shield in place. 11. Remove the lower windshield plates by WARNING! removing the six black round-headed Torx® head screws (using a #40 Torx® head driver) on You or others could be injured if you carry the each side of the base of the windshield. side bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the side bars from the vehicle or securely store

(Continued)

169 Raising The Windshield And 3. Attach the front of the side bar to the wind- 5. Install the lower windshield plates with the Replacing Side Bars shield frame. six black round-headed Torx® head screws • (using a #40 Torx® head driver) on each side of 1. Raise the windshield. Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The the base of the windshield. 2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the lower side bolt will not align until the top sport bar. Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Wind- two bolts are installed. shield And Removing Side Bars” earlier in this section.

6. Reinstall the wiper arms.

4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.

• Reattach the sport bar Velcro® covering.

170 REAR WINDOW FEATURES — Rotate the switch upward past the first NOTE: HARD TOP ONLY detent to activate the rear washer. The To prevent excessive battery drain, use the washer pump and the wiper will con- rear window defroster only when the engine tinue to operate as long as the switch is operating. Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If is held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle two to Equipped three times before returning to the set position. A rotary switch on the center portion of the CAUTION! control lever (located on the right side of the If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is Failure to follow these cautions can cause steering column) controls the operation of the turned to the LOCK position, the wiper will damage to the heating elements: automatically return to the “Park” position. rear wiper/washer function. • Use care when washing the inside of the When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume function at whichever position the rear window. Do not use abrasive window switch is set at. cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash- Rear Window Defroster — If ing solution, wiping parallel to the heating Equipped elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. The rear window defroster button is • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or located on the bottom right-side of the abrasive window cleaners on the interior blower control knob. Press this button surface of the window. to turn on the rear window defroster. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the Rear Wiper/Washer Control An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear win- window. Rotate the switch upward to the first dow defroster automatically turns off after ap- detent position for rear wiper operation. proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

171 172 4

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...... 175 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE ...... 176 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ...... 177 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS ...... 178 • COMPASS AND — IF EQUIPPED ...... 186 • Control Buttons ...... 187 • Compass/Temperature Display ...... 187 • Trip Conditions ...... 190 • ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 190 • Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays ...... 191 • Oil Change Required ...... 192 • EVIC Main Menu ...... 193 • Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . .193 • Average Fuel Economy ...... 196 • Distance To Empty (DTE) ...... 196 • Elapsed Time ...... 196 • System Status ...... 196 173 • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) ...... 197 • SOUND SYSTEMS ...... 198 • iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ...... 198 • Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device ...... 199 • Using This Feature ...... 199 • Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons ...... 199 • Play Mode ...... 199 • List Or Browse Mode ...... 200 • Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)...... 201 • STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...... 202 • Radio Operation ...... 202 • CD Player...... 202 • CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...... 203 • RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ...... 203 • CLIMATE CONTROLS ...... 203 • Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped ...... 203 • Operating Tips ...... 207

174 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 7 — Climate Controls 2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet 3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 4 — Assist Handle 10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped 5 — Glove Compartment 11 — Horn 6 — Power Window Switches

175 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

176 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

177 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped 7. Seat Belt Reminder Light DESCRIPTIONS This indicator will illuminate when the When the ignition switch is first turned front fog lights are on. to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for 1. four to eight seconds as a bulb check. The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel 4. Low Fuel Warning Light During the bulb check, if the driver’s tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After position. When the fuel level reaches approxi- the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat mately 2 U.S. Gallons (7.6L) this light belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning 2. Charging System Light will come on and remain on until fuel is Light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer added. The “Low Fuel Warning Light” may turn This light shows the status of the elec- to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know on and off again, especially during and after trical charging system. The light should Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further hard braking, accelerations, or turns. This oc- come on when the ignition switch is information. curs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank. first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as 8. Turn Signal Indicators a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on 5. Speedometer while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s The left or right arrow will flash with the non-essential electrical devices or increase en- Indicates vehicle speed. corresponding exterior turn signal gine speed (if at idle). If the charging system 6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped lights when the turn signal lever is light remains on, it means that the vehicle is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging sys- Indicates when the front axle lock driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn tem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an has been activated. signal on. authorized dealer. NOTE: If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. check for a defective outside light bulb.

178 9. Oil Pressure Warning Light 11. Brake Warning Light Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has This light shows low engine oil pres- This light monitors various brake func- dropped below a specified level. sure. The light should turn on momen- tions, including brake fluid level and tarily when the engine is started; if the bulb does parking brake application. If the brake The light will remain on until the cause is not come on, have the system checked by an light turns on it may indicate that the parking corrected. authorized dealer. If the light turns on while brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, NOTE: driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine or that there is a problem with the anti-lock as soon as possible. A chime will sound when brake system reservoir. The light may flash momentarily during this light turns on. sharp cornering maneuvers which change If the light remains on when the parking brake fluid level conditions. The vehicle should Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at have service performed, and the brake fluid corrected. This light does not indicate how the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it level checked. much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level indicates a possible brake hydraulic system must be checked under the hood. malfunction or that a problem with the Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock necessary. 10. High Beam Indicator Light Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Pro- This light shows that the high beam gram (ESP) system. In this case, the light will WARNING! headlights are on. Push the multifunc- remain on until the condition has been cor- Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is tion control lever away from you to rected. If the problem is related to the brake dangerous. Part of the brake system may booster, the ABS pump will run when applying switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the have failed. It will take longer to stop the lever toward you to switch the headlights back the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the felt during each stop. headlights or park lights are left on, the high vehicle checked immediately. The dual brake system provides a reserve beam indicator light will remain illuminated and braking capacity in the event of a failure to a a chime will sound. portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the

179 Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake 12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in System (ABS), are also equipped with Elec- “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” After the ignition is turned on, the tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the for further information. event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. illuminates to indicate function check 14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. at vehicle start-up. If the light remains on after start-up or comes on and stays on at road This light indicates when the rear Operation of the brake warning light can be speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has de- axle lock has been activated. checked by turning the ignition switch from the tected a malfunction or has become inopera- OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light tive. The system reverts to standard non-anti- should illuminate for approximately two sec- lock . onds. The light should then turn off unless the 15. Tachometer If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS parking brake is applied or a brake fault is Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer Indicates the engine speed in Revolutions Per detected. If the light does not illuminate, have immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” Minute (RPM x 1000). the light inspected by an authorized dealer. in “Starting And Operating”. NOTE: The light also will turn on when the parking 13. Air Bag Warning Light If equipped with a diesel engine and a brake is applied with the ignition switch in the manual transmission the vehicle will be ON/RUN position. This light will turn on for four to equipped with a Start/Stop mode. When the NOTE: eight seconds as a bulb check engine is off while in Stop/Start mode, ta- when the ignition switch is first This light shows only that the parking brake chometer needle will be in green banded turned to ON/RUN. If the light is is applied. It does not show the degree of zone of tachometer and the EVIC message either not on during starting, stays brake application. “Stop/Start Auto Stop Active” will display for on, or turns on while driving, have the system five seconds. For further information on the inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as Start/Stop system, refer to “Start/Stop Sys- tem” in “Starting And Operating”.

180 CAUTION! 17. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped CAUTION! Do not operate the engine with the tachom- This indicator will illuminate when the Driving with a hot engine cooling system eter pointer in the red area. Engine damage rear fog lights are on. could damage your vehicle. If the tempera- will occur. ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the 18. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi- 16. Coolant Temperature Warning Light tioner turned off until the pointer drops back This light will flash at a fast rate for into the normal range. If the pointer remains This light warns of an overheated en- approximately 15 seconds, when on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, gine condition. If the light turns on the vehicle security alarm is arm- while driving, safely pull over and stop ing, and then will flash slowly until turn the engine off immediately and call an the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. the vehicle is disarmed. authorized dealer for service. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and 19. Temperature Gauge idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off imme- The temperature gauge shows engine coolant WARNING! diately and call for service. temperature. Any reading within the normal A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. NOTE: range indicates that the engine cooling system You or others could be badly burned by is operating satisfactorily. As the coolant temperature gauge ap- steam or boiling coolant. You may want to proaches ؆H,؆ this indicator will illuminate The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher call an authorized dealer for service if your and a single chime will sound. Further over- temperature when driving in hot weather, up vehicle overheats. If you decide to look un- heating will cause the temperature gauge to mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It der the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your ؆ ؆ pass H. In this case, a continuous chime should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the of the normal operating range. will sound, until the engine is allowed to Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. cool.

181 20. Cruise Indicator Light 23. Shift Lever Indicator sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to This light shows when the elec- The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel tronic speed control system is the instrument cluster. It displays the gear po- efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the turned on. sition of the automatic transmission. vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 21. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped 24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for This light alerts the driver that the Each tire, including the spare (if proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s vehicle is in the four-wheel drive provided), should be checked responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, mode, and the front and rear drive- monthly when cold and inflated to even if under-inflation has not reached the level shafts are mechanically locked to- the inflation pressure recom- to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire gether forcing the front and rear mended by the vehicle manufac- pressure telltale. wheels to rotate at the same speed. turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation Your vehicle has also been equipped with a pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when 22. / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel different size than the size indicated on the the system is not operating properly. The TPMS Saver Indicator) Button vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, malfunction indicator is combined with the low you should determine the proper tire inflation Press this button to change the display from tire pressure telltale. When the system detects pressure for those tires.) odometer to either of the two trip odometer a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- settings or the “ECO” display. Trip A or Trip B will As an added safety feature, your vehicle has mately one minute and then remain continu- appear when in the trip odometer mode. Press been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring ously illuminated. This sequence will continue and hold the button for two seconds to reset the System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The sure telltale when one or more of your tires is the malfunction exists. When the malfunction odometer must be in trip mode to reset. significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when indicator is illuminated, the system may not be the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you able to detect or signal low tire pressure as should stop and check your tires as soon as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- variety of reasons, including the installation of

182 replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the 25. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning The odometer display shows the total distance The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be telltale after replacing one or more tires or shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Odom- used to modify driving habits in order to in- wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the eter / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indica- crease fuel economy. replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow tor) Button” for additional information. the TPMS to continue to function properly. LoW tirE Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate condition exists, the CAUTION! When the appropriate conditions exist, the fol- odometer display will toggle between LoW and The TPMS has been optimized for the origi- lowing odometer messages will display: tirE for three cycles. nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres- ECO ...... Fuel Saver Indicator “HOTOIL” Transmission Temperature Warn- sures and warning have been established for door ...... Door Ajar ing Message the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Un- gATE ...... Swing Gate Ajar The “HOTOIL” cluster message will appear in desirable system operation or sensor dam- LoW tirE ...... Low Tire Pressure age may result when using replacement the odometer accompanied with a chime to HOTOIL .....Transmission Oil Temperature indicate that there is excessive transmission equipment that is not of the same size, type, Above Normal Limits fluid temperature that might occur with severe and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause gASCAP ...... Fuel Cap Fault usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from noFUSE ...... Fuse Fault when operating the vehicle in a high torque a can or balance beads if your vehicle is converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive CHAngE OIL ...... Oil Change Required equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the operation (e.g., snow plowing, off-road opera- sensors may result. tion). If this “HOTOIL” message turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off.

183 CAUTION! noFUSE the oil change indicator system (after perform- ing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that Continuous driving with the Transmission following procedure: Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN illuminated will eventually cause severe installed, or damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For position (do not start the engine). transmission damage or transmission failure. further information on fuses and fuse locations 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. slowly three times within 5 seconds. WARNING! CHAngE OIL Message 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil position. Warning message is illuminated and you change indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” NOTE: continue operating the vehicle, in some cir- message will flash in the instrument cluster If the indicator message illuminates when cumstances you could cause the fluid to boil odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a you start the vehicle, the oil change indica- over, come in contact with hot engine or single chime has sounded to indicate the next tor system did not reset. If necessary, repeat scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil exhaust components and cause a fire. this procedure. change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may 26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) gASCAP fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) style. If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or Unless reset, this message will continue to System called OBD II that monitors damaged, a “gASCAP” message will display in the display each time you turn the ignition switch to engine and automatic transmission odometer display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message control systems. The light will illuminate when properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to temporarily, press and release the Trip Odom- the ignition is in the ON position before engine turn off the message. If the problem continues, the eter button on the instrument cluster. To reset start. If the bulb does not come on when turning message will appear the next time the vehicle is the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condi- started. tion checked promptly. 184 Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing is on solid, the ESP system has been turned off WARNING! (Continued) gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate by the driver or a temporary condition exists that the light after engine start. The vehicle should This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or will not allow full ESP function. be serviced if the light stays on through several park over flammable substances such as dry typical driving styles. In most situations, the plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re- 28. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator Light vehicle will drive normally and will not require sult in death or serious injury to the driver, This light will illuminate when the O/D towing. occupants or others. OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off. The O/D OFF button is located on the center console. CAUTION! 27. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indi- Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi- cator Light / Traction Control System (TCS) 29. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to Indicator Light This light will illuminate when the the engine control system. It also could affect If the Electronic Stability Program front sway bar is disconnected. fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is (ESP) / Traction Control System flashing, severe catalytic converter damage (TCS) Indicator Light begins to and power loss will soon occur. Immediate flash during acceleration, ease up service is required. on the accelerator and apply as 30. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF little throttle as possible. This indicator light Indicator Light — If Equipped starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction WARNING! and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) be- This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as ref- comes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. Be sure to erenced above, can reach higher tempera- adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing tures than in normal operating conditions. road conditions. If the ESP/TCS Indicator Light (Continued)

185 31. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light 32. Electronic Vehicle Information Center COMPASS AND TRIP This light informs you of a problem (EVIC) Display / Compass Mini-Trip Com- COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED puter Display — If Equipped with the Electronic Throttle Control The Compass/Trip Computer features a driver- (ETC) system. If a problem is de- When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis- interactive display (displays information on out- tected while the engine is running, play shows the Electronic Vehicle Information side temperature, compass direction, and trip the light will either stay on or flash Center (EVIC) messages. For further information, information). It is located on the lower left part of depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”. the cluster below the speedometer. the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed When the appropriate conditions exist, this display in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to the light remains on with the engine running, “Mini-Trip Computer” for further information. your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, 33. Water In Fuel Indicator Light — Diesel Only see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. This light indicates water has col- lected in the fuel filter and should If the light continues to flash when the engine is be drained immediately. See an running, immediate service is required and you authorized dealer for service. may experience reduced performance, an el- evated / rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come 34. Wait To Start Light — Diesel Only Compass Display on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN This light will illuminate when the and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light ignition switch is first turned to the does not come on during starting, have the ON position. Wait until the light system checked by an authorized dealer. turns off before starting the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating”.

186 Control Buttons NOTE: These messages can be cycled through by The Compass/Temperature control buttons are The system will display the last known out- pressing the STEP button on the steering located on the left spoke of the steering wheel. side temperature when starting the vehicle wheel. To reset the AVG ECO or ET, press and and may need to be driven several minutes hold the STEP button for approximately three before the updated temperature is dis- seconds. played. Engine temperature can also affect Compass/Temperature Display the displayed temperature; therefore, tem- NOTE: perature readings are not updated when the If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler vehicle is not moving. Uconnect® gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV Press and release the STEP button to step system will provide the compass direction, through each of the following CMTC features: and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable. The compass will perform • Compass/Outside Temperature accurately, based on GPS signals instead of • AVG ECO (Average Fuel Economy) the Earth’s magnetic field. Control Buttons • DTE (Distance to Empty) Compass Variance Press and release the STEP button on the • ET (Elapsed Time) Compass Variance is the difference between steering wheel to access the options in the Magnetic North and Geographic North. To com- Compass display. AVG ECO and ET can be reset. When the pensate for the differences, the variance should feature is displayed, press and hold the RESET be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, button until the feature resets (about 2 sec- per the zone map. Once properly set, the com- onds). pass will automatically compensate for the dif- ferences and provide the most accurate com- pass heading.

187 Compass Variance Map

188 To Set The Variance 2. Press and hold the RESET button (for ap- Average Fuel Economy / Distance To Start the engine and leave the transmission proximately 10 seconds) until the current vari- Empty (DTE) / Elapsed Time gear selector lever in the PARK position. Press ance zone number is displayed. • Average Fuel Economy and hold the RESET button on the steering 3. Release the RESET button, then press and wheel (for approximately ten seconds) until the hold again for approximately 10 seconds, until Shows the average fuel economy since the last current variance zone number is displayed. To the direction is displayed, with the CAL indicator reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the digits change the zone, press and release the STEP on continuously in the display. will go blank while the history information is button to increase the variance one step. Re- erased. The averaging will restart when enough peat as necessary until the desired variance is 4. To complete the compass calibration, drive new distance and fuel data is accumulated. the vehicle in one or more complete 360– achieved. • degree circles, under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area Distance To Empty (DTE) NOTE: free from power lines and large metallic objects, The factory default zone is 8. During pro- Shows the estimated distance that can be trav- until the CAL indicator turns off. The compass eled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This gramming, the zone value will wrap around will now function normally. from zone 15 to zone 1. estimated distance is determined by a weighted NOTE: average of the instantaneous and average fuel Manual Compass Calibration economy, according to the current fuel tank If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or • A good calibration requires a level sur- level. DTE cannot be reset. abnormal, you may wish to calibrate the com- face and an environment free from large • pass. Prior to calibrating the compass, make metallic objects such as buildings, Elapsed Time sure the proper zone is selected. bridges, underground cables, railroad Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the tracks, etc. 1. Start the engine and leave the transmission last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the in the PARK position. • Magnetic materials should be kept away ignition switch is in the RUN or START posi- from the top of the center of the instru- tions. The elapsed timer displays minutes:sec- ment panel. This is where the compass onds. After 59minutes:59seconds, it displays sensor is located. hours:minutes:seconds.

189 Trip Conditions Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver the last reset. Indicator) — If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped the last reset. Press and release the right button The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odom- driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be eter to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO. Press and hold used to modify driving habits in order to in- the right button while the odometer/trip odom- crease fuel economy. eter is displayed to reset. ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED This system conveniently allows the driver to The Electronic Vehicle Information Center select a variety of useful information by press- (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that ing the switches mounted on the steering is located in the instrument cluster. wheel. The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays • Digital Speedometer Trip Display Button • Vehicle Info Trip A • Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped) Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset. • Stop/Start System Status (if equipped)

190 • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable • MENU Button Electronic Vehicle Information Features) Press and release the MENU but- Center (EVIC) Displays • Compass Display ton to scroll through the main When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: • Outside Temperature Display menus (Fuel Economy, Warnings, Timer, Units, System, Personal • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning • Trip Computer Functions Settings) or to exit sub-menus. chime) • Uconnect® gps system screens (if equipped) • COMPASS Button • Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) The system allows the driver to select informa- Press and release the COMPASS tion by pressing the following buttons mounted button to display one of eight com- • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single on the steering wheel: pass readings and the outside tem- chime) perature or to exit sub-menus. • Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • SELECT Button • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a Press and release the SELECT single chime) button for access to main menus, • RKE Battery Low (with a single chime) sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park — Automatic Transmission • DOWN Button • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion — Manual Transmission EVIC Buttons Press and release the DOWN but- ton to scroll downward through the • Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors sub-menus. open, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph (1.6 km/h))

191 • Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more doors • Stop/Start Key Start Required — Diesel uled oil change interval. The engine oil change open, with a single chime if speed is above Manual Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/ indicator system is duty cycle based, which 1 mph (1.6 km/h)) Start System” in “Starting And Operating” for means the engine oil change interval may fluc- tuate dependent upon your personal driving • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is more details) style. in motion) • Service Stop/Start System — Diesel Manual Unless reset, this message will continue to • Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime) Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys- tem” in “Starting And Operating” for more display each time you turn the ignition switch to • Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in details) the ON position. To turn off the message tem- “Starting And Operating” for more details) porarily, press and release the MENU button. To • Stop/Start System Push Clutch Or Neutral — reset the oil change indicator system (after • Service Park Assist System (with a single Diesel Manual Transmission Only (refer to performing the scheduled maintenance), per- chime) “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operat- form the following procedure: • Oil Change Required (with a single chime) ing” for more details) 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. • Low Tire Pressure • ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped Do not start the engine. • Service TPM System — (refer to “Tire Pres- • Stop/Start Not Ready — Diesel Manual 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly sure Monitoring System” in “Starting and Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys- three times within 10 seconds. tem” in “Starting And Operating” for more Operating” for more details) 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- details) • Premium TPM System Graphic Display tion. • Stop/Start Ready — Diesel Manual Trans- mission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in Oil Change Required NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil “Starting And Operating” for more details) If the indicator message illuminates when change indicator system. The “Oil Change Re- you start the vehicle, the oil change indica- • Stop/Start Auto Stop Active — Diesel Manual quired” message will flash in the EVIC display tor system did not reset. If necessary, repeat Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys- for approximately 10 seconds after a single this procedure. tem” in “Starting And Operating” for more chime has sounded to indicate the next sched- details) 192 EVIC Main Menu NOTE: NOTE: To step to each main menu feature press and For features in the EVIC that can be reset The system will display the last known out- release the MENU button once for each step. A (Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), side temperature when starting the vehicle step from the last item in the list will cause the the EVIC prompts a reset with a SELECT and may need to be driven several minutes first item in the feature list to be displayed. The button graphic and the word RESET next to before the updated temperature is dis- following features are in the Main menu: it. played. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, tem- • Compass, Outside Temperature, and ECO When the SELECT button is pressed, the se- perature readings are not updated when the display lected feature will reset and RESET ALL will vehicle is not moving. • Digital Speedometer display next to the SELECT button graphic. • Pressing SELECT a second time will reset both ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped Average Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time. After The ECO message will display below the out- • Distance to Empty three seconds without pressing SELECT, RE- side temperature in the EVIC display (if the SET ALL will return to RESET and only the audio system is on the ECO indicator will over- • Elapsed Time selected feature will have been reset. ride the audio information display line if the • Vehicle Information "Display Fuel Saver" personal setting is ON — • Coolant Temp Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver see "Personal Settings" section). This message • Oil Pressure Mode) — If Equipped will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel The compass readings indicate the direction the efficient manner. • Transmission Temp vehicle is facing. Press and release the COM- • This feature allows you to monitor when you are Oil Life Remaining (Automatic Oil Change PASS button to display one of eight compass driving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be Indicator) headings, the outside temperature/ECO if the used to modify driving habits in order to in- • EVIC display is not already displaying this EVIC Units Selection crease fuel economy. screen. • System Status • Personal Settings • Tire PSI 193 Automatic Compass Calibration you must put the compass into the Calibration Compass Variance This compass is self-calibrating, which elimi- Mode manually as follows: Compass Variance is the difference between nates the need to set the compass manually. 1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in Magnetic North and Geographic North. To com- When the vehicle is new, the compass may PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming pensate for the differences, the variance should appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL” Menus. be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, until the compass is calibrated. You may also per the zone map. Once properly set, the com- calibrate the compass by completing one or 2. Press the MENU button until Personal Set- pass will automatically compensate for the dif- more 360–degree turns (in an area free from tings (Customer-Programmable Features) dis- ferences and provide the most accurate com- large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” plays in the EVIC. pass heading. message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate NOTE: compass will now function normally. Compass” displays in the EVIC. Magnetic materials should be kept away NOTE: 4. Press and release the SELECT button to from the top of the instrument panel; this is A good calibration requires a level surface start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will where the compass sensor is located. and an environment free from large metallic display in the EVIC. objects such as buildings, bridges, under- ground cables, railroad tracks, etc. 5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic ob- Manual Compass Calibration jects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” compass will now function normally. indicator does not appear in the EVIC display,

194 Compass Variance Map

195 To Change The Compass Variance: Distance To Empty (DTE) Elapsed time is displayed as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch RUN (it is not nec- Shows the estimated distance that can be trav- • Hours essary to start the engine). eled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted • Minutes 2. Press the MENU button until Personal Set- average of the instantaneous and average fuel • Seconds tings (Customer-Programmable Features) dis- economy, according to the current fuel tank plays in the EVIC. level. DTE cannot be reset. Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the 3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass NOTE: EVIC display). Upon reset all digits will change Variance” message and the last variance zone Significant changes in driving style or ve- to zeros and time will start incrementing again if number displays in the EVIC. hicle loading will greatly affect the actual the ignition switch is in RUN or START. 4. Press and release the SELECT button until drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless the proper variance zone is selected according of the DTE display value. System Status to the map. Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active When the DTE value is less than 30 miles Warning Messages stored. Pressing and re- 5. Press and release the COMPASS button to (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE leasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OK is exit. display will change to a text display of "LOW displayed will do nothing. Displays SYSTEM FUEL”. This display will continue until the ve- WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Average Fuel Economy hicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant Shows the average fuel economy since the last Warning Messages stored. Pressing and re- amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the reset. Average Fuel Economy can be reset by leasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will pressing and holding the SELECT button (as WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display display. each stored warning for each button press. prompted in the EVIC display). Upon reset, the Press and Release the MENU button to return history information will be erased, and the av- Elapsed Time to the Main Menu. eraging will continue from the last fuel average Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the reading before the reset. last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.

196 Personal Settings (Customer- feature showing the system has been activated Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock Programmable Features) or the check-mark is removed showing the When on is selected, the front and rear turn Personal Settings allows the driver to set and system has been deactivated. signals will flash when the doors are locked or recall features when the vehicle speed is at Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit — If unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature 0 mph (0 km/h) (manual transmission) or when Equipped may be selected with or without the sound horn the shift lever is in PARK (auto transmission). When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when on lock feature selected. To make your selec- the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in tion, press and release the SELECT button until Press and release the MENU button until Per- “On” or “Off” appears. sonal Settings displays in the EVIC. the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press Delay Turning Headlights Off Use the DOWN button to display one of the and release the SELECT button until “On” or When this feature is selected, the driver can following choices: “Off” appears. choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, Language Remote Key Unlock 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. When in this display you may select one of five When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only To make your selection, press and release the languages for all display nomenclature, includ- the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” ing the trip functions and the navigation system the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter appears. (if equipped). Press the SELECT button while in UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit this display to select English, Espanol or Fran- selected, you must press the RKE transmitter When this feature is selected, the power win- cais. Then, as you continue, the information will UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen- dow switches, radio, hands–free system (if display in the selected language. ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), Auto Lock Doors selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets When this feature is selected, all doors will lock press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed To make your selection, press and release the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. of 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this can be enabled or disabled, to make your “All Doors 1st Press” appears. feature. To make your selection, press and selection, press and release the SELECT but- release the SELECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” ton until a check-mark appears next to the “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears. 197 Illumination Approach — If Equipped Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped SOUND SYSTEMS When this feature is selected, the headlights will When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet. activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in when the doors are unlocked with the RKE “Starting And Operating” for system function transmitter. To make your selection, press and and operating information. To make your selec- iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — hold the SELECT button until “Off,” “30 sec,” “60 tion, press and release the SELECT button until IF EQUIPPED sec,” or “90 sec” appears. “On” or “Off” appears. This feature allows an iPod® or external USB Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped device to be plugged into the USB port, located Auto Headlights Only) The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/ in the center console. When ON is selected, and the multifunction Temperature display; this message can be iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, lever is placed in the AUTO position, the head- turned on or off. To make your selection, press 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® lights will turn on approximately 10 seconds and release the SELECT button until “ON” or software versions may not fully support the after the wipers are turned ON. The headlights “OFF” appears. iPod® control features. Please visit Apple’s will also turn off when the wipers are turned EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) website for software updates. OFF if they were turned ON by this feature. To Displays the units used for the Outside Tem- make your selection, press and release the NOTE: perature, Average Fuel Economy and Distance SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. • to Empty features. Press and Release the SE- If the radio has a USB port, refer to the Nav–Turn By Turn LECT button to toggle units between "U.S." and appropriate Uconnect® Supplement When this feature is selected, the navigation "METRIC". Manual for iPod® or external USB device system utilizes voice commands, guiding support capability. Compass Variance through the drive route, mile by mile, turn-by- • Refer to “Compass Display” for more informa- Connecting an iPod® or consumer elec- turn until the final destination is reached. To tion. tronic audio device to the AUX port lo- make your selection, press and release the cated in the radio faceplate, plays media, SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Calibrate Compass but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control Refer to “Compass Display” for more informa- feature to control the connected device. tion. 198 Connecting The iPod® Or External NOTE: Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device If the audio device battery is completely USB Device Using Radio Buttons Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® discharged, it may not communicate with To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode or external USB device to the vehicles USB/ the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system until a and access a connected audio device, either AUX connector port which is located in the minimum charge is attained. Leaving the press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate or " " " center console. audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/ press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB." Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3 control MP3 control system may charge it to the mode, audio tracks (if available from audio required level. device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. Using This Feature By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB Play Mode device to connect to the USB port: When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control • The audio device can be played on the mode, the iPod® or external USB device auto- vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata matically starts Play mode. In Play mode, the (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on following buttons on the radio faceplate may be the radio display. used to control the iPod® or external USB device and display data: Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port • The audio device can be controlled using the • Once the audio device is connected and syn- radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the Use the TUNE control knob to select the next chronized to the vehicles iPod®/USB/MP3 con- iPod® contents. or previous track. trol system (iPod® or external USB device may • The audio device battery charges when • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, take a few minutes to connect), the audio plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if sup- while playing a track, skips to the next track device starts charging and is ready for use by ported by the specific audio device). or press the VR button and say "Next Track." pressing radio switches, as described below.

199 • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by have been viewed, the last INFO button List Or Browse Mode one click, will jump to the previous track in press will go back to the play mode screen on During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons the list or press the VR button and say the radio. described below, will bring up List mode. List "Previous Track." • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the mode enables scrolling through the list of • Jump backward in the current track by press- audio device mode to repeat the current menus and tracks on the audio device. ing and holding the << RW button. Holding playing track or press the VR button and say • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob the << RW button long enough will jump to "Repeat ON" or "Repeat Off." functions in a similar manner as the scroll the beginning of the current track. • Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/ wheel on the audio device or external USB • Jump forward in the current track by pressing MP3 device scan mode, which will play the device. and holding the FF>> button. first 10 seconds of each track in the current • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counter- • A single press backward << RW or forward list and then forward to the next song. To stop clockwise (backward) scrolls through the FF>> will jump backward or forward respec- SCAN mode and start playing the desired lists, displaying the track detail on the radio tively, for five seconds. track, when it is playing the track, press the display. Once the track to be played is high- SCAN button again. During Scan mode, lighted on the radio display, press the TUNE • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to pressing the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons control knob to select and start playing the jump to the previous or next track. Pressing will select the previous and next tracks. track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will the SEEK >> button during play mode will • RND button (available on sales code RES scroll through the list faster. During fast jump to the next track in the list, or press the scroll, a slight delay in updating the informa- VR button and say "Next or Previous Track." radio only): Pressing this button toggles be- tween Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for tion on the radio display may be noticeable. • While a track is playing, press the INFO the iPod® or external USB device, or press • During all List modes, the iPod® displays all button to see the associated metadata (artist, the VR button and say "Shuffle ON" or lists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing "Shuffle Off." If the RND icon is showing on at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel the INFO button again jumps to the next the radio display, then the shuffle mode is backward (counterclockwise) to get to the screen of data for that track. Once all screens ON. track faster.

200 • • In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top- WARNING! used as shortcuts to the following lists on the menu item to be selected and press the iPod® or external USB device: TUNE control knob. This will display the next Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB device while driving. Failure to • Preset 1 – Playlists sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired follow this warning could result in an acci- • Preset 2 – Artists track in that list. Not all iPod® or external dent. • Preset 3 – Albums USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system. • Preset 4 – Genres Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE • Preset 5 – Audiobooks Music can be streamed from your cellular button is another shortcut button to the genre phone to the Uconnect® phone system. • Preset 6 – Podcasts listing on your audio device. Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons • Pressing a PRESET button will display the To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button CAUTION! current list on the top line and the first item in on the radio or press the VR button and say that list on the second line. • Leaving the iPod® or external USB device “Bluetooth Streaming Audio.” (or any supported device) anywhere in the • To exit List mode without selecting a track, Play Mode press the same PRESET button again to go vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter When switched to BTSA mode, some audio back to Play mode. the operation or damage the device. Fol- devices can start playing music over the vehi- low the device manufacturer’s guidelines. • LIST button: The LIST button will display the cle’s audio system, but some devices require • top level menu of the iPod® or external USB Placing items on the iPod® or external the music to be initiated on the device first, then device. USB device, or connections to the iPod® it will get streamed to the Uconnect® phone or external USB device in the vehicle, can system. Seven devices can be paired to the cause damage to the device and/or to the Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be connectors. selected and played.

201 Selecting A Different Audio Device STEERING WHEEL AUDIO Pressing the center button will make the radio 1. Press the PHONE button to begin. CONTROLS switch between the various modes available. 2. After the "Ready" prompt and following the The remote sound system controls are located The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch beep, say "Setup", then say "Select Audio De- on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach with a pushbutton in the center. The function of vices." behind the wheel to access the switches. the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect® phone system to list the audio de- The following describes the left-hand control vices. operation in each mode. Next Track Radio Operation Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for button on the radio and say “Next Track,” to the next listenable station and pressing the jump to the next music track on your cellular bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the phone. next listenable station. Previous Track The button located in the center of the left-hand Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR control will tune to the next preset station that you button on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton. Steering Wheel) jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone. The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch CD Player with a pushbutton in the center and controls the Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the Browse next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth volume and mode of the sound system. Press- ing the top of the rocker switch will increase the switch once will go to the beginning of the Streaming Audio (BTSA) device. Only the cur- current track, or to the beginning of the previous rent song that is playing will display info. volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.

202 If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures CLIMATE CONTROLS the second track; three times, it will play the may become too high. The air conditioning and heating system is third, etc. NOTE: designed to make you comfortable in all types The center button on the left side rocker switch If you experience difficulty in playing a par- of weather. has no function for a single-disc CD player. ticular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., Automatic Temperature Control However, when a multiple-disc CD player is scratched, reflective coating removed, a equipped on the vehicle, the center button will (ATC) — If Equipped hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, select the next available CD in the player. or have protection encoding. Try a known CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE good disc before considering disc player service. To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions: RADIO OPERATION AND 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. noisy performance from your radio. This condi- 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat- Automatic Temperature Control scratching the disc. ing the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio perfor- Automatic Operation 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thin- mance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the The Automatic Temperature Control system au- ner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended tomatically maintains the climate in the cabin of 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. that the radio volume be turned down or off the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).

203 Operation of the system is quite simple. blower control stops the system completely and cia protectors may reduce airflow to the Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and closes the outside air intake. condenser, reducing air conditioning the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO. The recommended setting for maximum com- performance. • NOTE: fort is 72° F (22° C) for the average person; While operating in AUTO, the system will however, this may vary. not automatically sense the presence of The AUTO position performs best for front NOTE: fog, mist or ice on the windshield. The seat occupants only. defrost mode must be manually selected Temperature Control • The temperature setting can be adjusted to clear the windshield and side glass. at anytime without affecting automatic Manual Operation operation. Dial in the temperature This system offers a full complement of manual you would like the sys- • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control override features, which consist of Blower Pre- tem to maintain by rotat- button while in AUTO mode will cause the ferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or ing the Temperature LED in the control button to flash three Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This Control knob. Once the times and then turn off. This indicates means the operator can override the blower, the comfort level is se- that the system is in AUTO mode and mode, or both. There is a manual blower range lected, the system will requesting the air conditioning is not for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. maintain that level auto- necessary. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed matically using the heat- • by rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left). ing system. Should the If your air conditioning performance desired comfort level require air conditioning, seems lower than expected, check the NOTE: the system will automatically make the front of the A/C condenser located in front Please read the Automatic Temperature adjustment. of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt Control Operation Chart that follows for de- or insects. Clean with a gentle water tails. You will experience the greatest efficiency by spray from behind the radiator and simply allowing the system to function automati- through the condenser. Fabric front fas- cally. Selecting the “O” (OFF) position on the

204 205 Blower Control NOTE: This setting works best in cold or snowy condi- tions that require extra heat to the windshield. For full automatic opera- The center instrument panel outlets can be This setting is good for maintaining comfort tion or for automatic aimed so that they are directed toward the while reducing moisture on the windshield. blower operation, turn rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. the knob to the AUTO • Defrost position. In manual • Bi-Level mode there are seven Air is directed through the windshield blower speeds that can Air is directed through the panel and and side window demist outlets. Use be individual selected. floor outlets. this mode with maximum blower and In off position the blower temperature settings for best windshield and will shut off. NOTE: side window defrosting. For all settings, except full cold or full hot, • Air Conditioner Control The operator can override the AUTO mode there is a difference in temperature between setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air Press this button to turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives on the air conditioning the following positions. improved comfort during sunny but cool during manual opera- conditions. tion only. When the air • Panel conditioning is turned • Floor Air is directed through the outlets in the on, cool dehumidified air instrument panel. These outlets can be Air is directed through the floor outlets will flow through the out- adjusted to direct airflow. with a small amount flowing through the lets selected with the defrost and side window demist outlets. Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air • Mix conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates Air is directed through the floor, de- when manual compressor operation is selected. frost, and side window demist outlets. 206 • Recirculation Control • Extended use of recirculation may cause If you would like the system to go into the windows to fog. If the interior of the Recirculation Mode, you must first move The system will automatically con- windows begins to fog, press the Recir- the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Bi-Level trol recirculation. However, press- culation button to return to outside air. and then press the Recirculation button. ing the Recirculation Control button Some temp/humidity conditions will This feature reduces the possibility of will temporarily put the system in cause captured interior air to condense window fogging. recirculation mode. This can be on windows and hamper visibility. For used when outside conditions such as smoke, this reason, the system will not allow Operating Tips odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Acti- Recirculation to be selected while in de- vating recirculation will cause the LED in the NOTE: frost mode. Attempting to use the recircu- control button to illuminate. Refer to the chart at the end of this section lation while in this mode will cause the for suggested control settings for various NOTE: LED in the control button to blink and weather conditions. then turn off. • When the ignition switch is turned to the Summer Operation LOCK position, the recirculation feature • Most of the time, when in Automatic Op- will be cancelled. eration, you can temporarily put the sys- The engine cooling system must be protected tem into Recirculation Mode by pressing with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation the Recirculation button. However, under proper corrosion protection and to protect mode may lead to excessive window fog- certain conditions, while in Automatic against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ging. The Recirculation mode is not al- Mode, the system is blowing air out the OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that lowed in the defrost mode in order to defrost vents. When these conditions are meets the requirements of Chrysler Material improve window clearing. Recirculation present, and the Recirculation button is Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recom- will be disabled automatically if this mode pressed, the indicator will flash and then mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in is selected. turn off. This tells you that you are unable “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant to go into Recirculation Mode at this time. selection.

207 Winter Operation cient heating. If side window fogging becomes a Outside Air Intake Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle win- Make sure the air intake, located directly in front months is not recommended because it may dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as cause window fogging. or humid weather. leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may Vacation Storage NOTE: reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Recirculate without A/C should not be used months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, for long periods as fogging may occur. run the air conditioning system at idle for about slush, and snow. five minutes in the fresh air and high blower Side Window Demisters A/C Air Filter — If Equipped settings. This will ensure adequate system lu- A side window demister outlet is located at each The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen brication to minimize the possibility of compres- end of the instrument panel. These non- from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air sor damage when the system is started again. adjustable outlets direct air toward the side coming from outside the vehicle and recircu- windows when the system is in the FLOOR, lated air within the passenger compartment. Window Fogging MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main- the area of the windows through which you view taining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service removed by turning the mode selector to De- the outside mirrors. frost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to information or see your authorized dealer for maintain a clear windshield and provide suffi- service. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service intervals.

208 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

209 210 5

STARTING AND OPERATING

• STARTING PROCEDURES ...... 215 • Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 215 • Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 215 • Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine ...... 215 • Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C) ...... 216 • If Engine Fails To Start ...... 216 • After Starting ...... 217 • Normal Starting — Diesel Engine ...... 217 • STOP/START SYSTEM — DIESEL MODELS WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION ONLY ...... 219 • Automatic Mode...... 219 • ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 221 • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 222 • Key Ignition Park Interlock ...... 223 • Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ...... 223 • Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ...... 223 • Gear Ranges ...... 224 • AUTOSTICK®...... 227 • Operation...... 227

211 • MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 228 • Shifting ...... 228 • Downshifting ...... 229 • Reverse Shifting...... 230 • FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMAND-TRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®) ...... 230 • Operating Instructions/Precautions ...... 230 • Shift Positions ...... 231 • Shifting Procedure ...... 232 • AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON MODELS ...... 233 • ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED ...... 233 • ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ...... 234 • OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ...... 235 • Side Step Removal — If Equipped ...... 235 • The Basics Of Off-Road Driving ...... 235 • When To Use 4L (Low) Range...... 236 • Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation ...... 236 • Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ...... 236 • Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)...... 237 • Hill Climbing ...... 238 • Driving Through Water ...... 240 • After Driving Off-Road ...... 241 • POWER STEERING ...... 242 • Power Steering Fluid Check ...... 242 • PARKING BRAKE ...... 243 • ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 244

212 • ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ...... 245 • Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 245 • Traction Control System (TCS) ...... 246 • Brake Assist System (BAS) ...... 246 • Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...... 246 • Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ...... 249 • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 249 • ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light ...... 253 • Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...... 254 • Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped ...... 254 • TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 255 • Tire Pressure ...... 255 • Tire Inflation Pressures ...... 256 • Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation ...... 256 • Radial Ply Tires ...... 257 • Tire Types ...... 257 • Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ...... 258 • Spare Tires — If Equipped...... 258 • Tire Spinning ...... 259 • Tread Wear Indicators ...... 260 • Life Of Tire ...... 260 • Replacement Tires ...... 261 • TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) ...... 262 • TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 262 • TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) ...... 263 • Base System...... 265 213 • Premium System – If Equipped ...... 266 • TPMS Deactivation ...... 269 • FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES ...... 269 • Methanol ...... 270 • Ethanol ...... 270 • Clean Air Gasoline ...... 270 • MMT In Gasoline ...... 270 • Materials Added to Fuel ...... 271 • FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL ENGINES ...... 271 • ADDING FUEL ...... 272 • Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...... 272 • TRAILER TOWING ...... 273 • Common Towing Definitions ...... 273 • Breakaway Cable Attachment ...... 274 • Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .....276 • Trailer And Tongue Weight ...... 277 • Towing Requirements ...... 278 • Towing Tips ...... 282 • Trailer Hitch Attaching Points ...... 283 • RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...... 284 • Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ...... 284 • Recreational Towing — Four — Wheel Drive Models ...... 285

214 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued) Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, • Do not leave the key fob in or near the adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and Start the engine with the shift lever in the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- fasten your seat belts. NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake dren, and do not leave the ignition of a before shifting to any driving range. vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- WARNING! Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine • When leaving the vehicle, always remove could operate power windows, other con- NOTE: the key fob from the ignition and lock your trols, or move the vehicle. Normal starting of either a cold or a warm vehicle. engine is obtained without pumping or • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Manual Transmission — If Equipped pressing the accelerator pedal. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Turn the ignition switch to the START position Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- and release when the engine starts. If the NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before start- tended is dangerous for a number of rea- engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ing the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to sons. A child or others could be seriously clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” or fatally injured. Children should be unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. warned not to touch the parking brake, procedure. 4WD Models Only brake pedal or the shift lever. Tip Start Feature — Automatic In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of Transmission Only (Continued) whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the Turn the ignition switch to the START position floor. This feature enhances off-road perfor- and release it as soon as the starter engages. mance by allowing the vehicle to start when in The starter motor will continue to run, but will 4L without having to press the clutch pedal. The automatically disengage itself when the engine “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter transfer case has been shifted into this mode. will disengage automatically in 10 seconds.

215 If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the Without Tip Start (Manual Transmission WARNING! (Continued) LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then Only) repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F automatic transmission cannot be started Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push or –29°C) this way. Unburned fuel could enter the the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and To ensure reliable starting at these tempera- catalytic converter and, once the engine hold it there while cranking the engine. This tures, use of an externally powered electric has started, ignite and damage the con- should clear any excess fuel in case the engine engine block heater (available from your autho- verter and vehicle. is flooded. rized dealer) is recommended. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, If Engine Fails To Start booster cables may be used to obtain a CAUTION! start from a booster battery or the battery To prevent damage to the starter, do not WARNING! in another vehicle. This type of start can be crank the engine for more than 15 seconds dangerous if done improperly. Refer to • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emer- into the throttle body air inlet opening in an again. gencies” for further information. attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious per- sonal injury.

(Continued)

216 If the engine has been flooded, it may start to LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then 4. Tip Start Feature (Automatic Transmis- run, but not have enough power to continue repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. sion Only) running when the key is released. If this occurs, Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition continue cranking with the accelerator pedal CAUTION! pushed all the way to the floor. Release the key to the START position and then release it. accelerator pedal and the key once the engine To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to The starter motor will continue to run, and it will is running smoothly. 15 seconds before trying again. automatically disengage when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter If the engine shows no sign of starting after two will disengage automatically in 25 seconds. If 15–second periods of cranking with the accel- After Starting this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK erator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “Normal The idle speed will automatically decrease as position, wait 25 to 30 seconds, then repeat the Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce- the engine warms up. “Normal Starting” procedure. dures. Normal Starting — Diesel Engine NOTE: With Tip Start (Automatic Transmission Only) The starter motor may run up to 30 seconds 1. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or If the engine fails to start after you have followed in very cold conditions until the engine is PARK position before you can start the engine. the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold started. The starter can be disengaged by Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. turning the ignition key to the OFF position, if required. clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator 3. Watch for the “Wait To Start Light” in the pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” turn the ignition switch to the START position in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for and release it as soon as the starter engages. further review. It will glow for two to ten seconds The starter motor will disengage automatically or more, depending on engine temperature. in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the When the “Wait To Start Light” goes out, the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the engine is ready to start.

217 5. Without Tip Start Feature (Manual Trans- If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate charger before shut down, depending upon the mission Only) the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes type of driving and the amount of cargo. before full loads are applied. Turn the ignition switch to the START position Before turning off your turbo diesel engine, and release when the engine starts. If the Engine Idling – In Cold Weather always allow the engine to return to normal engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures idle speed and run for several seconds. This ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to below 0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling may assures proper lubrication of the turbo- 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” be harmful to your engine because combustion charger. This is particularly necessary after procedure. chamber temperatures can drop so low that the any period of hard driving. fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete com- Idle the engine a few minutes before routine 6. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for bustion allows carbon and varnish to form on shutdown. After full load operation, idle the approximately 30 seconds before driving. This piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the engine three to five minutes before shutting it allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo- unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting down. This idle period will allow the lubricating charger. the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine. oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from Engine Warm-Up Stopping the Engine the combustion chamber, bearings, internal Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is The following chart should be used as a guide in components, and turbocharger. This is espe- cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the determining the amount of engine idle time cially important for turbocharged, charge air engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the required to sufficiently cool down the turbo- cooled engines. oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up. NOTE: High-speed, no-load running of a cold en- gine can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine performance. No-load en- gine speeds should be kept under 1,200 rpm during the warm-up period, especially in cold, ambient temperature conditions.

218 TURBOCHARGER "COOL DOWN" CHART Driving Load Turbocharger Idle Time (In Minutes) Conditions Temperature Before Shut Down Stop & Go Empty Cool Less than 1 Stop & Go Medium Warm 1 Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2 City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3 Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4 Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5 STOP/START SYSTEM — Automatic Mode To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP DIESEL MODELS WITH The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur: normal customer engine start. It will remain in 1. The system must be in STOP/START MANUAL TRANSMISSION ONLY STOP/START NOT READY until you drive for- READY state. A STOP/START READY mes- The Stop/Start function is developed to save ward with a vehicle speed greater than 3 mph sage will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle fuel and reduce emissions. The system will stop (5 km/h). At that time, the system will go into Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if STOP/START READY and if all other conditions Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under- the required conditions are met. Pressing the are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in- clutch pedal will automatically re-start the ve- STOP ACTIVE mode. formation. hicle. 2. Vehicle speed must be less 3 mph (5 km/h).

219 3. Shifter must be in the NEUTRAL position • Hood is open • Battery voltage drops too low and the clutch pedal must be fully released • Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode • Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake The engine will shut down, the tachometer will It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven pedal applications fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/ several times without the STOP/START system • Vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will ap- going into a STOP/START READY state under pear, and the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air • STOP/START OFF switch is pressed more extreme conditions of the items listed flow will be reduced. above. • 4WD system is put into 4LO mode Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not To Start The Engine While In The Conditions that force a manual key cycle AUTO STOP STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode start while in STOP/START AUTO STOP Prior to engine shut down, the system will check When the shift lever is in NEUTRAL, the engine ACTIVE mode: many safety and comfort conditions to see if will start when the clutch pedal is pressed. The The Engine Will Not Start Automatically If: they are fulfilled. In following situations the vehicle will go into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT engine will not stop: • The driver’s seatbelt was unbuckled READY mode until the vehicle speed is greater • Driver’s seat belt is not buckled than 3 mph (5 km/h). • The engine hood has been opened • Outside temperature is less than 1°F (–17°C) Conditions that will cause the engine to start • A STOP/START system error occurs or greater than 104°F (40°C) automatically while in STOP/START AUTO The engine may then only be restarted with an • Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif- STOP ACTIVE mode ignition key cycle. The STOP/START KEY ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC The Engine Will Start Automatically When: START REQUIRED message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • • HVAC is set to full defrost mode Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif- under these conditions. Refer to “Electronic • Engine has not reached normal operating ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under- temperature • HVAC is set to full defrost mode standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in- formation. • Battery discharged • STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time ex- • When driving in REVERSE ceeds 5 minutes 220 To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop 4. If the STOP/START system is manually ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF System turned off. the engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition switch EQUIPPED 1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located The engine block heater warms the engine, and on the switch bank). The light on the switch will 5. The STOP/START system will reset itself permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect illuminate. back to an ON condition every time the key is the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical turned off and back on. outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension To Manually Turn On The Start Stop cord. System The engine block heater must be plugged in at 1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located least one hour to have an adequate warming on the switch bank). effect on the engine. 2. The light on the switch will turn off. The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray. System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the WARNING! STOP/START OFF Switch engine. A SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM Remember to disconnect the engine block message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle heater cord before driving. Damage to the 2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under- electrocution. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in- (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument formation. Panel” for further information. The system will need to be checked by your 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the authorized dealer. STOP/START system) the engine will not be stopped. 221 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) IF EQUIPPED • Unintended movement of a vehicle could • Do not leave the ignition key/key fob in or injure those in or near the vehicle. As with near the vehicle, or in a location accessible CAUTION! all vehicles, you should never exit a ve- to children. A child could operate power Damage to the transmission may occur if the hicle while the engine is running. Before windows, other controls, or move the ve- following precautions are not observed: exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking hicle. • • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has brake, shift the transmission into PARK, It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or come to a complete stop. turn the engine OFF, and remove the igni- NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the tion key. Once the key is removed, the than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly vehicle has come to a complete stop and transmission is locked in PARK, securing pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could the engine is at idle speed. the vehicle against unwanted movement. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. • • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, When leaving the vehicle, always remove You could lose control of the vehicle and NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is the ignition key and lock your vehicle. hit someone or something. Only shift into • above idle speed. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or gear when the engine is idling normally • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow- and your foot is firmly pressing the brake foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. ing children to be in a vehicle unattended pedal. is dangerous for a number of reasons. A NOTE: child or others could be seriously or fatally You must press and hold the brake pedal injured. Children should be warned not to while shifting out of PARK. touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

(Continued)

222 Key Ignition Park Interlock Five-Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission shift lever has only PARK, This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park – If Equipped REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift posi- Interlock which requires the transmission to be The transmission gear position display (located tions. Manual shifts can be made using the in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmis- Autostick® shift control (refer to "AutoStick®" in to the LOCK position. The key can only be sion gear range. You must press the brake this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or removed from the ignition when the ignition is in pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will manu- the LOCK position, and the transmission is to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” ally select the transmission gear and will display locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in this section). To drive, move the shift lever the current gear in the instrument cluster as 5, in the LOCK position. from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. 4, 3, 2, 1. NOTE: The electronically-controlled transmission pro- If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap vides a precise shift schedule. The transmission the key in the ignition switch to warn you electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the that this safety feature is inoperable. The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be some- engine can be started and stopped but the what abrupt. This is a normal condition, and key cannot be removed until you obtain precision shifts will develop within a few hun- service. dred miles (kilometers). Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the System vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis- the brake pedal when shifting between these Shift Lever sion Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the gears. shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are ap- plied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. 223 When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake Gear Ranges WARNING! (Continued) DO NOT race the engine when shifting from before shifting the transmission to PARK, oth- • PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. erwise the load on the transmission locking Your vehicle could move and injure you mechanism may make it difficult to move the and others if it is not completely in PARK. NOTE: shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, Check by trying to move the shift lever out • After selecting any gear range, wait a turn the front wheels toward the curb on a of PARK with the brake pedal released. moment to allow the selected gear to downhill grade and away from the curb on an Make sure the transmission is in PARK engage before accelerating. This is espe- uphill grade. before leaving the vehicle. cially important when the engine is cold. NOTE: • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or • If there is a need to restart the engine, be On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher sure to cycle the ignition to the LOCK the transfer case is in a drive position. than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly position before restarting. Transmission pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could gear engagement may be delayed after WARNING! accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. restarting the engine if the ignition is not You could lose control of the vehicle and cycled to the LOCK position first. • Never use the PARK position as a substi- hit someone or something. Only shift into tute for the parking brake. Always apply PARK (P) gear when the engine is idling normally the parking brake fully when parked to This range supplements the parking brake by and your foot is firmly pressing the brake guard against vehicle movement and pos- locking the transmission. The engine can be pedal. started in this range. Never attempt to use sible injury or damage. PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the (Continued) parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this (Continued) range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

224 The following indicators should be used to WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) ensure that you have engaged the transmission • Unintended movement of a vehicle could • Do not leave the ignition key/key fob in or into the PARK position: injure those in or near the vehicle. As with near the vehicle, or in a location accessible • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the all vehicles, you should never exit a ve- to children. A child could operate power shift lever all the way forward and to the left hicle while the engine is running. Before windows, other controls, or move the ve- until it stops and is fully seated. exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking hicle. • brake, shift the transmission into PARK, Look at the transmission gear position dis- play and verify that it indicates the PARK and remove the ignition key. Once the position. ignition key is removed, the transmission is CAUTION! • locked in PARK, securing the vehicle • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. against unwanted movement. you must place the ignition from the LOCK/ • When leaving the vehicle, always remove OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and REVERSE (R) the ignition key and lock your vehicle. also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, This range is for moving the vehicle backward. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or damage to the shift lever could result. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow- • DO NOT race the engine when shifting ing children to be in a vehicle unattended from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear NEUTRAL (N) is dangerous for a number of reasons. A range, as this can damage the drivetrain. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for child or others could be seriously or fatally prolonged periods with the engine running. The injured. Children should be warned not to engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the PARK if you must leave the vehicle. shift lever.

(Continued)

225 WARNING! gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off driving characteristics under all normal operat- service without damaging the transmission. the ignition to coast down a hill. These are ing conditions. In the event of a momentary problem, the unsafe practices that limit your response to When frequent transmission shifting occurs transmission can be reset to regain all forward changing traffic or road conditions. You might (such as when operating the vehicle under gears by performing the following steps: lose control of the vehicle and have a colli- heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, travel- 1. Stop the vehicle. sion. ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift control 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section) to select a 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. CAUTION! lower gear. Under these conditions, using a 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for lower gear will improve performance and ex- tend transmission life by reducing excessive any other reason with the transmission in 5. Restart the engine. shifting and heat buildup. NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Transmission Limp Home Mode problem is no longer detected, the transmission “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Dis- Transmission function is monitored electroni- will return to normal operation. cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition is abled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergen- detected that could result in transmission dam- NOTE: cies” for further information. age, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti- Even if the transmission can be reset, we vated. In this mode, the transmission remains in recommend that you visit your authorized DRIVE (D) the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a dealer at your earliest possible conve- This range should be used for most city and stop. After the vehicle has stopped, the trans- nience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos- highway driving. It provides the smoothest up- mission will remain in second gear regardless of tic equipment to determine if the problem shifts and downshifts, and the best fuel which forward gear is selected. PARK, RE- could recur. If the transmission cannot be economy. The transmission automatically up- VERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper- reset, authorized dealer service is required. shifts through underdrive first, second, and third ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may 226 Overdrive Operation Operation • The transmission will automatically downshift The automatic transmission includes an elec- When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lug- tronically controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The the transmission will operate automatically, ging) and will display the current gear. transmission will automatically shift into Over- shifting between the five available gears. To • The transmission will automatically downshift drive if the following conditions are present: engage AutoStick®, simply tap the shift lever to to first gear when coming to a stop. After a • The shift lever is in the DRIVE position. the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE position. stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick® mode will down- transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. • Vehicle speed is sufficiently high. shift the transmission to the next lower gear, • You can start out, from a stop, in first or • The driver is not heavily pressing the while using (+) to enter AutoStick® mode will second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow accelerator. retain the current gear. When AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is dis- starting in second gear. Starting out in sec- AUTOSTICK® played in the instrument cluster. ond gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. • AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift The system will ignore attempts to upshift at feature providing manual shift control, giving up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by too low of a vehicle speed. you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick® the driver, unless an engine lugging or over- • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi- speed condition would result. It will remain in is engaged. nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and the selected gear until another upshift or down- • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable improve overall vehicle performance. shift is chosen, except as described below. when AutoStick® is engaged. This system can also provide you with more • The transmission will automatically upshift NOTE: control during passing, city driving, cold slippery when necessary to prevent engine over- conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and speed. When the transfer case is in the 4L (Low) range, the transmission will shift automati- many other situations. • Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will cally (but no higher than the displayed gear). generate an automatic downshift (for im- proved acceleration) when reasonable.

227 To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift CAUTION! Shifting lever to the right (+) until "D" is once again Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting displayed in the instrument cluster. You can shift Never drive with your foot resting on the gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly in or out of the AutoStick® mode at any time clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle press the accelerator pedal. without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. on a hill with the clutch pedal partially en- You should always use first gear when starting gaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on from a standing position. WARNING! the clutch. Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds Do not downshift for additional engine brak- To utilize your manual transmission efficiently NOTE: ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels for both fuel economy and performance, it could lose their grip and the vehicle could During cold weather, you may experience should be upshifted as listed in recommended skid, causing a collision or personal injury. increased effort in shifting until the trans- shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds mission fluid warms up. This is normal. listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF speeds may not apply. EQUIPPED

WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. Shift Pattern

228 Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90) 3.6L Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

NOTE: CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are • • for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L Skipping gears and downshifting into lower Failure to follow the maximum recom- would be significantly less. gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage mended downshifting speeds may cause the engine and clutch systems, Any attempt the engine damage and/or damage the Downshifting to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is depressed may result damage to the clutch • Descending a hill in low range with clutch recommended to preserve brakes when driving system. Shifting into lower gear and releas- pedal depressed could result in clutch down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the ing the clutch may result in engine damage. damage right time provides better acceleration when you • desire to resume speed. Downshift progres- When descending a hill, be very careful to sively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding downshift one gear at a time to prevent Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds the engine and clutch. overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, CAUTION! WARNING! even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If Failure to follow the maximum recommended Do not downshift for additional engine braking transfer case is in low range the vehicle downshifting speeds may cause the engine to on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could speeds to cause engine and clutch dam- overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid. age are significantly lower. even if the clutch pedal is pressed. (Continued) 229 Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24) NOTE: FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are OPERATION (COMMAND- for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less. TRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®)

Reverse Shifting WARNING! To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Press the clutch and pause Failure to engage a transfer case position briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating. completely can cause transfer case damage or Beginning from the NEUTRAL position, move loss of power and vehicle control. You could the shift lever in one quick, smooth motion have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls straight across and into the REVERSE area unless the transfer case is fully engaged. (the driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the “knock-over”). Complete the shift by The transfer case is intended to be driven in the pulling the shift lever into REVERSE. Operating Instructions/Precautions 2H position for normal street and highway con- The transfer case provides four mode positions: ditions such as hard-surfaced roads. The “knock-over” provides a resistance to the • driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE 2H (Two-wheel drive high range) In the event that additional traction is required, shift area and warns the driver that they are • 4H (Four-wheel drive high range) the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be about to shift the transmission into REVERSE. • N (Neutral) used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSE • can be perceived as a high shift effort. 4L (Four-wheel drive low range) rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L 230 positions are intended for loose, slippery road When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine WARNING! (Continued) surfaces only and not intended for normal driv- speed will be approximately three times (four ing. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to move hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire positions at a given road speed. Take care not regardless of the transmission position. The wear and damage to the driveline components. to overspeed the engine. parking brake should always be applied Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles when the driver is not in the vehicle. further information on shifting into 4H or 4L. depends on tires of equal size, type, and cir- The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instru- cumference on each wheel. Any difference will Shift Positions ment cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is adversely affect shifting and cause damage to For additional information on the appropriate in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear the transfer case. use of each 4WD system mode position, see driveshafts are locked together. The light will Because four-wheel drive provides improved the information below: illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe the 4H position. 2H Position turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster This range is used for normal street and high- NOTE: than road conditions permit. way driving on hard-surfaced roads. Do not attempt to shift when only the front or 4H Position rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case WARNING! is not equipped with a synchronizer, and the This range locks the front and rear driveshafts You or others could be injured if you leave front and rear driveshaft speeds must be together, forcing the front and rear wheels to equal for a shift to take place. Shifting while the vehicle unattended with the transfer case rotate at the same speed. This range (4H) only the front or rear wheels are spinning in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first provides additional traction for loose, slippery can cause damage to the transfer case. fully engaging the parking brake. The trans- road surfaces and should not be used on dry fer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages pavement. both the front and rear drive shaft from the The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instru- ment cluster) will illuminate when the transfer (Continued) case is shifted into the 4H position.

231 N (Neutral) Position Shifting Procedure NOTE: This range disengages the front and rear drive- 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the shafts from the powertrain. It is to be used for Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi- flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the culty may occur due to the mating teeth not “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat- vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/ being properly aligned. Several attempts ing” for further information. disengage faster if you momentarily release the may be required for clutch teeth alignment 4L Position accelerator pedal after completing the shift. and shift completion to occur. The preferred This range locks the front and rear driveshafts Apply a constant force when shifting the trans- method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to together, forcing the front and rear wheels to fer case lever. 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to rotate at the same speed. This range (4L) engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H provides additional traction and maximum pull- moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to ing power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into WARNING! NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instru- manual transmission. While the vehicle is Failure to engage a transfer case position ment cluster) will illuminate when the transfer coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the completely can cause transfer case damage case is shifted into the 4L position. transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. or loss of power and vehicle control. You NOTE: Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neu- could have a collision. Do not drive the When in 4WD, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” tral). Once the shift is completed, place the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully en- will display in the instrument cluster. automatic transmission into DRIVE or release gaged. the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

232 AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — To activate the system, press the bottom of the This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle switch located on the instrument panel (to the RUBICON MODELS only (the “Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light” will left of the steering column). The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instru- illuminate), press the bottom of the switch again ment panel (to the left of the steering column). to lock the front axle (the “Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate). When the rear axle is locked, pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle. NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked. To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch. Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken Sway Bar Switch Axle Lock Switch out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the turned to the OFF position. system. Press the switch again to deactivate This feature will only activate when the following the system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” conditions are met: ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate • Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range. DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash during activation tran- • Your vehicle may be equipped with an elec- Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or sition, or when activation conditions are not tronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This less. met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in system allows greater front suspension travel in on-road mode during normal driving conditions. off-road situations.

233 WARNING! NOTE: ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance due to left and right suspension height differ- and a narrower track to make them capable of on hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above ences. This condition is due to driving surface performing in a wide variety of off-road applica- 18 mph (29 km/h); you may lose control of differences or vehicle loading. In order for the tions. Specific design characteristics give them the vehicle, which could result in serious stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. injury. The front stabilizer bar enhances ve- the right and left halves of the bar must be An advantage of the higher ground clearance is hicle stability and is necessary for maintain- aligned. This alignment may require that the a better view of the road, allowing you to ing control of the vehicle. The system moni- vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side. anticipate problems. They are not designed for tors vehicle speed and will attempt to cornering at the same speeds as conventional reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low- 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a BAR switch again. slung sports cars are designed to perform sat- flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” isfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all pos- Once vehicle speed is reduced below WARNING! sible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once again If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss attempt to return to off-road mode. on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” of control or vehicle rollover. will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to stability is greatly reduced. Do not attempt to either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). to obtain the off-road position. Refer to “Four- Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Oper- cause loss of control of the vehicle, which ating” for further information. The “Sway Bar could result in serious injury. Contact your Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected. local authorized dealer for assistance.

234 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS turns or braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Side Step Removal — If Equipped Therefore, you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not. When NOTE: on a trail, you should always be looking ahead Prior to off-road usage, the side steps for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. should be removed to prevent damage. The key is to plan your future driving route while 1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside. remembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION! 3. Remove the side step assembly. Never park your vehicle over dry grass or The Basics Of Off-Road Driving other combustible materials. The heat from You will encounter many types of terrain driving your vehicle exhaust system could cause a off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain fire. and area before proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. WARNING! Every surface has a different effect on your 2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Con- Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie vehicle. trolling your vehicle is one of the keys to suc- down cargo. Unsecured cargo can become cessful off-road driving, so always keep a firm projectiles in an off-road situation. grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations,

235 When To Use 4L (Low) Range jerking or lurching. This technique is also used Mud When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on Deep mud creates a great deal of suction additional traction and control on slippery or a steep incline. around the tires and is very difficult to get difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep through. You should use second gear (manual hills, and to increase low speed pulling power. Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmis- This range should be limited to extreme situa- Snow sion), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) tions such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, In heavy snow or for additional control and position to maintain your momentum. If you or sand where additional low speed pulling traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an (Low) range. than necessary to maintain headway. Over- increased threat of vehicle damage and getting revving the engine can spin the wheels and stuck. They are normally full of debris from CAUTION! traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good prac- tice before entering any mud hole, get out and Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still apply- determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hard- ing throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recov- ware damage can result. "bite" and help maintain your momentum. ered if stuck. Sand Simultaneous Brake And Throttle CAUTION! Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy Operation On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at Many off-road driving conditions require the spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle’s momen- high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, be- tum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft simultaneous use of the brake and throttle cause engine braking may cause skidding (two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, sand is using the appropriate tire pressure, and loss of control. or other stepped objects, using light brake pres- accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers sure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas

236 or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a mini- Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring them with your tires. This will lift your undercar- mum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the riage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will vehicle forward until it makes contact with the tougher and thicker than the side wall and is drastically improve your traction and handling object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead while driving on the soft sand, but you must light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and make every effort to cross the large rocks return the tires to normal air pressure before and over the object. with your tires. driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to WARNING! CAUTION! reducing the pressure. Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steer- • Never attempt to straddle a rock that is ing system loading which could cause you to large enough to strike your axles or under- CAUTION! loose control of your vehicle. carriage. Reduced tire pressures may cause tire un- • Never attempt to drive over a rock which is seating and total loss of air pressure. To Using A Spotter large enough to contact the door sills. reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a There are many times where it is hard to see the reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed obstacle or determine the correct path. Deter- Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. mining the correct path can be extremely diffi- Or Rut cult when you are confronting many obstacles. When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or In these cases have someone guide you over, a large rut, the angled approach is the key to Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And through, or around the obstacle. Have the per- Other High Points) maintaining your vehicle’s mobility. Approach son stand a safe distance in front of you where these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let While driving off-road, you will encounter many they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and each tire go through the obstacle independently. types of terrain. These varying types of terrain undercarriage, and guide you through. You need to use caution when crossing large bring different types of obstacles. Before pro- obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to ceeding, review the path ahead to determine Crossing Large Rocks cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an the correct approach and your ability to safely When approaching large rocks, choose a path angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. which ensures you drive over the largest of 237 a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small CAUTION! Hill Climbing trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle Hill climbing requires good judgment and a ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater good understanding of your abilities and your fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. diameter than the running ground clearance vehicle’s limitations. Hills can cause serious You should now be able to drive out following or the vehicle will become high-centered. problems. Some are just too steep to climb and the trench you just created at a 45-degree should not be attempted. You should always angle. Getting High-Centered feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. If you get hung up or high-centered on an You should always climb hills straight up and WARNING! object, get out of the vehicle and try to deter- down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle. There is an increased risk of rollover when mine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is Before Climbing A Steep Hill contacting the underbody and what is the best crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with As you approach a hill, consider its grade or direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on steep sides. steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is and place a few rocks under the tires so the the trail straight up and down? What is on top Crossing Logs weight is off of the high point when you let the and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle vehicle down. You can also try rocking the branches or other obstacles on the path? Can (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object. you safely recover the vehicle if something goes one front tire to be on top of the log while the wrong? If everything looks good and you feel other just starts to climb the log. While climbing CAUTION! confident, shift the transmission into a lower the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. caution, maintaining your momentum as you objects increases the risk of underbody dam- Then ease the vehicle off the log using your climb the hill. brakes. age. Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to pro- ceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible 238 run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle Driving Downhill Driving Across An Incline and apply more power as you start up the hill. Before driving down a steep hill, you need to If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. If it is necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose What is the surface traction? Is the grade too Driving across an incline places more weight on control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent? the downhill wheels, which increases the pos- off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is sibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make on the ground. As you approach the crest of the there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to sure the surface has good traction with firm and hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at the top. If the wheels start to slip as you you feel confident in your ability to proceed, an angle heading slightly up or down. approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accel- then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and pro- erator and maintain headway by turning the ceed with caution. Allow engine braking to con- WARNING! steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly trol the descent and apply your brakes, if nec- back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" essary, but do not allow the tires to lock. Driving across an incline increases the risk of into the surface and will usually provide enough a rollover , which may result in severe injury. traction to complete the climb. If you do not WARNING! make it to the top, place the vehicle in RE- If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway VERSE and back straight down the grade using Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. If you stall or begin to lose headway while engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes. Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with en- climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come gine braking. Descending a grade too fast to a stop and immediately apply the brake. WARNING! could cause you to lose control and be Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. seriously injured or killed. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine brak- Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or ing to control the descent and apply your turn around on a steep grade. Driving across brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to an incline increases the risk of a rollover, lock. which may result in severe injury.

239 into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has If the engine stalls or you lose headway or ingested water first. The key to any crossing is • This vehicle is capable of crossing through cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual trans- water at a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so mission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), speeds no greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position Water ingestion can occur causing dam- which may result in severe injury. Always and proceed very slowly with a constant slow age to your vehicle. back carefully straight down a hill in RE- speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try VERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL Before You Cross Any Type Of Water to accelerate through the crossing. After cross- using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive As you approach any type of water, you need to ing any water higher than the bottom of the axle determine if you can cross it safely and respon- diagonally across a hill, always drive straight differentials, you should inspect all of the ve- sibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the up or down. hicle fluids for signs of water ingestion. water or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and Driving Through Water CAUTION! bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy Extreme care should be taken crossing any • Water ingestion into the axles, transmis- waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure type of water. Water crossings should be sion, transfer case, engine or vehicle inte- you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you avoided, if possible, and only be attempted rior can occur if you drive too fast or can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to when necessary in a safe, responsible manner. a safe crossing is the water depth, current and through too deep of water. Water can You should only drive through areas which are bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle designated and approved. You should tread cause permanent damage to engine, will sink in, effectively increasing the water level lightly and avoid damage to the environment. driveline or other vehicle components, and on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when You should know your vehicle’s abilities and be your brakes will be less effective once wet determining the depth and the ability to safely able to recover it if something goes wrong. You and/or muddy. cross. should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water (Continued)

240 Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow After Driving Off-Road Or Other Standing Water water, a high current can still wash the dirt out Off-road operation puts more stress on your Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water from around your tires putting you and your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After areas normally contain murky or muddy waters. vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of going off-road, it is always a good idea to check These water types normally contain hidden personal injury and vehicle damage with slower for damage. That way you can get any problems obstacles and make it difficult to determine an water currents in depths greater than the vehi- taken care of right away and have your vehicle accurate water depth, approach angle, and cle’s running ground clearance. You should ready when you need it. bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes never attempt to cross flowing water which is • Completely inspect the underbody of your are where you want to hook up tow straps prior deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clear- vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and ance. Even the slowest current can push the suspension, and exhaust system for dam- easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to deter- heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control age. mine you can safely cross, than proceed using if the water is deep enough to push on the large the low and slow method. surface area of the vehicle’s body. Before you • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and proceed, determine the speed of the current, clean as required. CAUTION! the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom con- • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, par- dition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross Muddy waters can reduce the cooling sys- ticularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo- at an angle heading slightly upstream using the nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten tem effectiveness by depositing debris onto low and slow technique. the radiator. them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual. WARNING! • Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Check for accumulations of plants or brush. Never drive through fast moving deep water. It Or Other Flowing Water These things could be a fire hazard. They Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or it out of control. This could put you and your axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts. river even in shallow water. Fast moving water passengers at risk of injury or drowning. can easily push your vehicle downstream,

241 • After extended operation in mud, sand, wa- POWER STEERING WARNING! ter, or similar dirty conditions, have the radia- The standard power steering system will give Continued operation with reduced power tor, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, you good vehicle response and increased ease steering assist could pose a safety risk to and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system soon as possible. will provide mechanical steering capability if yourself and others. Service should be ob- power assist is lost. tained as soon as possible. WARNING! If for some reason the power assist is inter- Abrasive material in any part of the brakes rupted, it will still be possible to steer your CAUTION! may cause excessive wear or unpredictable vehicle. Under these conditions, you will ob- braking. You might not have full braking serve a substantial increase in steering effort, Prolonged operation of the steering system power when you need it to prevent a colli- especially at very low vehicle speeds and dur- at the end of the steering wheel travel will sion. If you have been operating your vehicle ing parking maneuvers. increase the steering fluid temperature and it in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked NOTE: should be avoided when possible. Damage and cleaned as necessary. to the power steering pump may occur. • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered nor- • If you experience unusual vibration after driv- mal and do not indicate that there is a Power Steering Fluid Check ing in mud, slush or similar conditions, check problem with the power steering system. Checking the power steering fluid level at a the wheels for impacted material. Impacted • defined service interval is not required. The fluid material can cause a wheel imbalance and Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for should only be checked if a leak is suspected, freeing the wheels of it will correct the abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the sys- situation. a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. tem is not functioning as anticipated. Coordi- This noise should be considered normal, nate inspection efforts through an authorized and it does not in any way damage the dealer. steering system.

242 When the parking brake is applied with the CAUTION! PARKING BRAKE ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in Do not use chemical flushes in your power Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to the instrument cluster will illuminate. steering system as the chemicals can dam- leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or NOTE: age your power steering components. Such manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle • When the parking brake is applied and the Limited Warranty. The parking brake lever is located in the center automatic transmission is placed in gear, console. To apply the parking brake, pull the the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If lever up as firmly as possible. To release the vehicle speed is detected, a chime will parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press WARNING! sound to alert the driver. Fully release the the center button, then lower the lever com- parking brake before attempting to move Fluid level should be checked on a level pletely. the vehicle. surface and with the engine off to prevent • This light only shows that the parking injury from moving parts and to ensure ac- brake is applied. It does not show the curate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use degree of brake application. only manufacturer’s recommended power steering fluid. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any transmission, apply the parking brake before spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining load on the transmission locking mechanism Your Vehicle” for further information. Parking Brake may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

243 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM • Never use the PARK position on an auto- • Be sure the parking brake is fully disen- The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control matic transmission as a substitute for the gaged before driving; failure to do so can under adverse braking conditions. The system parking brake. Always apply the parking lead to brake failure and a collision. operates with a separate computer to modulate • brake fully when parked to guard against Always fully apply the parking brake when hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and vehicle movement and possible injury or leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. damage. damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an • All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same When leaving the vehicle, always remove automatic transmission in PARK, a manual size and type, and tires must be properly in- the key fob from the ignition and lock your transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Fail- flated to produce accurate signals for the com- vehicle. ure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll puter. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or and cause damage or injury. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow- WARNING! ing children to be in a vehicle unattended Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or is dangerous for a number of reasons. A CAUTION! mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle child or others could be seriously or fatally If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with can lead to loss of braking effectiveness. injured. Children should be warned not to the parking brake released, a brake system touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the malfunction is indicated. Have the brake The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low shift lever. system serviced by an authorized dealer • speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for Do not leave the key fob in or near the immediately. any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h), this check dren. A child could operate power win- will be delayed until 25 mph (40 km/h). dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued) 244 The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs WARNING! (Continued) ELECTRONIC BRAKE during the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure. The • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, includ- CONTROL SYSTEM motor pump makes a low humming noise during ing those resulting from excessive speed Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced operation; this is normal. in turns, following another vehicle too electronic brake control system that includes closely, or hydroplaning. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Con- trol System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), WARNING! • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped ve- Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation hicle must never be exploited in a reckless • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will di- (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), minish their effectiveness and may lead to or dangerous manner which could jeopar- Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Hill Descent a collision. Pumping makes the stopping dize the user’s safety or the safety of Control (HDC). All of these systems work to- distance longer. Just press firmly on your others. gether to enhance vehicle stability and control brake pedal when you need to slow down in various driving conditions, and are commonly or stop. referred to as ESC. CAUTION! • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to prevent the natural laws of physics from This system aids the driver in maintaining ve- acting on the vehicle, nor can they in- possible detrimental effects of electronic in- hicle control under adverse braking conditions. crease braking or steering efficiency be- terference caused by improperly installed The system controls hydraulic brake pressure yond that afforded by the condition of the aftermarket radios or telephones. to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skid- vehicle brakes and tires or the traction ding on slippery surfaces during braking. afforded. NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing (Continued) sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning.

245 WARNING! axle is spinning faster than the other, the sys- WARNING! tem will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of This will allow more engine torque to be applied The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre- physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature vent the natural laws of physics from acting increase the traction afforded by prevailing remains active even if TCS and ESC are in on the vehicle, nor can it increase the trac- road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer tion afforded by prevailing road conditions. collisions, including those resulting from ex- to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including cessive speed in turns, driving on very slip- section for further information. those resulting from excessive speed in pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabili- Brake Assist System (BAS) turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or ties of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS- be exploited in a reckless or dangerous braking capability during emergency braking equipped vehicle must never be exploited in manner which could jeopardize the user’s maneuvers. The system detects an emergency a reckless or dangerous manner which could safety or the safety of others. braking situation by sensing the rate and jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of amount of brake application and then applies others. optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help Traction Control System (TCS) reduce braking distances. The BAS comple- This system monitors the amount of wheel spin ments the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Apply- Hill Start Assist (HSA) of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is ing the brakes very quickly results in the best The HSA system is designed to assist the driver detected, brake pressure is applied to the slip- BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. ping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to system, you must apply continuous braking HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure provide enhanced acceleration and stability. pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not the driver applied for a short period of time after A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is If the driver does not apply the throttle during slip differential and controls the wheel spin released, the BAS is deactivated. this short period of time, the system will release across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in 246 proportion to amount of throttle applied as the • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc- HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles vehicle starts to move in the intended direction tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward The system will work in REVERSE, and all of travel. gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE forward gears on vehicles equipped with an gear). automatic transmission. The system will not WARNING! activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL. If the clutch pedal (manual transmission WARNING! HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles only) remains pressed during the application There may be situations on minor hills with a The system will work in REVERSE, forward of the throttle, the HSA will disengage allow- loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer gears, and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles. The system does not recog- ing the vehicle to roll down the incline. This where the system will not activate and slight nize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles, thus it will rolling may occur, which could cause a colli- could cause a collision with another vehicle hold the vehicle on an incline for a short period or object. To avoid this, do not apply throttle sion with another vehicle or object. Always while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch posi- while pressing the clutch pedal until you are remember the driver is responsible for brak- tion. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll down ready to release the clutch. Always remem- ing the vehicle. a hill simply by putting the transmission in ber the driver is responsible for braking the NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle, vehicle. The system will only work if the intended direc- as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling. tion of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. For Instead, use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction. HSA Activation Criteria example, if the intended direction is forward up The following criteria must be met in order for a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE (automatic HSA to activate: transmission equipped vehicle), and the activa- tion criteria are met, HSA will activate. • Vehicle must be stopped • Vehicle must be on an 8% (approximately) or greater incline (approximately 3% for manual transmission equipped vehicles)

247 Towing With HSA HSA Off WARNING! (Continued) HSA will provide assistance when starting on a If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow grade when pulling a trailer. • Failure to follow these warnings may this procedure: cause the vehicle to roll down the incline 1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK and could collide with another vehicle, WARNING! (automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL with object or person, and cause serious or • If you use a trailer brake controller with clutch out (manual transmission) with wheels fatal injury. Always remember to use the your trailer, your trailer brakes may be straight. Apply parking brake on manual trans- parking brake while parking on a hill and activated and deactivated with the brake mission vehicle. that the driver is responsible for braking switch. If so, when the brake pedal is 2. Start the engine. the vehicle. released there may not be enough brake 3. With the engine running, the brake applied, pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on and the clutch out, rotate the steering wheel NOTE: a hill and this could cause a collision with 180° counterclockwise from center. The HSA system may also be turned on and another vehicle or object behind you. In off if the vehicle is equipped with the Elec- 4. Press the ESC OFF switch four times within order to avoid rolling down the hill while tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Re- twenty seconds. resuming acceleration, manually activate fer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center 5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise the trailer brake prior to releasing the (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument (180° clockwise from center). brake pedal. Always remember the driver Panel” for further information. is responsible for braking the vehicle. 6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON. • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply 7. If the sequence was completed properly, the the parking brake fully when leaving your “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will vehicle. Also, be certain to leave the trans- blink several times to confirm HSA is off. mission in PARK. Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enable (Continued) HSA functionality.

248 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) WARNING! ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine This system anticipates the potential for wheel the vehicle path intended by the driver and lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM conditions and driving conditions, influence When the actual path does not match the determines that the rate of change of the steer- the chance that wheel lift or rollover may intended path, ESC applies the brake of the ing wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are suffi- occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can- appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the cient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, espe- oversteer or understeer condition. appropriate brake and may reduce engine cially those that involve leaving the roadway • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will or striking objects or other vehicles. The than appropriate for the steering wheel posi- occur. ERM will only intervene during very se- capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle tion. vere or evasive driving maneuvers. must never be exploited in a reckless or • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only re- dangerous manner which could jeopardize than appropriate for the steering wheel duce the chance of wheel lift occurring during the user’s safety or the safety of others. position. severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (located in the instrument cluster), starts to flash objects or other vehicles. This system enhances directional control and as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/ NOTE: stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for over/under Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off” steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to Electronic the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting Indicator Light” begins to flash during accelera- Stability Control (ESC) for a complete expla- the over/under steer condition. Engine power tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little nation of the available ESC modes. may also be reduced to help the vehicle main- throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed tain the desired path. and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

249 WARNING! 4H Range (4WD Models) NOTE: On To improve the vehicle’s traction when driv- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot ing with snow chains, or starting off in deep prevent the natural laws of physics from This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range. snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing traction afforded by prevailing road condi- Partial Off the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, includ- This mode is entered by momentarily pressing requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial ing those resulting from excessive speed in the ESC OFF switch. When in "Partial Off" Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or mode, the TCS portion of ESC (except for the momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch. hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent ac- limited slip feature described in the TCS sec- " This may be done while the vehicle is in cidents resulting from loss of vehicle control tion), has been disabled and the ESC Off " motion. due to inappropriate driver input for the con- Indicator Light will be illuminated. ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle driver can prevent accidents. The capabili- is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and WARNING! ties of an ESC equipped vehicle must never more wheel spin than ESC would normally • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func- be exploited in a reckless or dangerous allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip again, momentarily press the ESC OFF switch. manner which could jeopardize the user’s feature described in the TCS section), has This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator safety or the safety of others. operation. Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial The ESC system has three available operating Off” mode, the engine power reduction modes in 4H range. The system has one oper- feature of TCS is disabled, and the en- ating mode in 4L range. Two-wheel drive ve- hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC hicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in 2H range system is reduced. have two operating modes. (Continued) 250 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled With the ESC in "Full Off" mode, the engine when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" torque reduction and stability features of- mode. fered by ESC and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ESC Off ERM systems will not engage to assist in This mode is entered by pressing and holding maintaining stability. The “Full Off” ESC momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch for 5 mode is intended for off-road use only. seconds. ESC OFF Switch In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque 4L Range (4WD Models) ESC Off reduction and stability features are disabled. When in ESC Off mode, ESC and TCS, except Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability of- for the Brake Limited Differential (BLD) feature This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L fered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency described in the TCS section, are turned off until range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC (64 km/h). For speeds at or exceeding 40 mph shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range, Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road (64 km/h) the ESC goes into partial off. When the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4L use only. the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph range, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake (56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to off. To Limited Differential (BLD) feature described in turn ESC on again, momentarily press the ESC the TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle OFF switch. This will restore normal “ESC On” reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For mode of operation. The "ESC Off Indicator speeds at or exceeding 40 mph (64 km/h) the Light” will always be illuminated when ESC is off ESC goes into partial off. When the vehicle and partial off. speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system shuts off. The ESC is off at low vehicle

251 speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere 2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models OFF switch. Once the situation requiring ESC with off-road driving, but the ESC function re- On to be switched to the ؆Partial Off؆ mode is turns to provide the stability feature at speeds This is the normal operating mode for ESC in overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESC OFF Indi- 2H range and on 2WD vehicles. pressing the ESC OFF switch. This may be cator Light” will always be illuminated in 4L done while the vehicle is in motion. range when ESC is off. Partial Off The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode NOTE: When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of after each key on. The “ESC OFF” message will display and ESC (except for the limited slip feature described the audible chime will sound when the shift in the TCS section), has been disabled and the NOTE: lever is placed in the PARK position from "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. To improve the vehicle’s traction when driv- any position other than PARK, and then This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is ing with snow chains, or starting off in deep moved out of the PARK position. This will in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to occur even if the message was previously more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing cleared. is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again, the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation momentarily press the ESC OFF switch. This will requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial " " WARNING! restore the normal ESC On mode of operation. Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by In the ESC "Full Off" mode, the engine NOTE: momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch. torque reduction and stability features are To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving This may be done while the vehicle is in disabled. In an emergency evasive maneu- with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, motion. ver, the ESC system will not engage to assist sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch in maintaining stability. "ESC Off" mode is to the ؆Partial Off؆ mode by pressing the ESC intended for off-highway or off-road use only.

252 WARNING! ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator erator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light sure to adapt your speed and driving to the • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func- prevailing road conditions. tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip The “ESC Activation/Malfunction NOTE: feature described in the TCS section), has Indicator Light” in the instrument • been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator cluster will come on when the igni- The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial tion switch is cycled to the ON “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Off” mode, the engine power reduction position. It should go out with the Light” come on momentarily each time feature of TCS is disabled, and the en- engine running. If the “ESC the ignition switch is turned ON. hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes • Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the system is reduced. on continuously with the engine running, a ESC system will be ON even if it was • Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled malfunction has been detected in the ESC cycled off previously. system. If this light remains on after several when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" • ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven The ESC system will make buzzing or mode. several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater clicking sounds when it is active. This is than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized normal; the sounds will stop when ESC dealer as soon as possible to have the problem becomes inactive following the maneuver diagnosed and corrected. that caused the ESC activation. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” in- to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the dicates the Electronic Stability ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Control (ESC) is partially off or full Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also off. flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accel- 253 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) WARNING! When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize activates when the vehicle is descending a hill. an excessively swaying trailer and will take the If TSC activates while driving, slow the ve- HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. hicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, suit the driving conditions. The speed corre- The system may reduce engine power and and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sponds to the transmission gear selected. apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to sway. counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will Gear Approximate HDC become active automatically once an exces- Set Speed Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If sively swaying trailer is recognized. TSC cannot 1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h) stop all trailers from swaying. Always use cau- Equipped tion when towing a trailer and follow the tongue HDC is only intended for low speed off-road 2nd 2.5 mph (4 km/h) weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow- driving. HDC maintains vehicle speed while 3rd 4 mph (6.5 km/h) ing” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor- descending hills in off-road driving conditions by mation. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC applying the brakes when necessary. 4th 5.5 mph (9 km/h) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, The symbol indicates the status of DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h) the engine power may be reduced and you may the Hill Descent Control (HDC) fea- REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h) feel the brakes being applied to individual ture. The lamp will be on solid wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from sway- when HDC is armed. HDC can only However, the driver can override HDC opera- ing. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in be armed when the transfer case is tion by applying the brake to slow the vehicle the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. in the “4WD LOW” position and the down below the HDC control speed. If more vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If speed is desired during HDC control, the accel- these conditions are not met while attempting to erator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will usual manner. When either the brake or the flash on/off. accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed.

254 Enabling HDC TIRES — GENERAL WARNING! (Continued) 1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. INFORMATION • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Start- problems. You could lose control of your ing and Operating” for further information. Tire Pressure vehicle. 2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the • Unequal tire pressures from one side of safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Descent Control Indicator Light” in the instru- the vehicle to the other can cause the ment cluster will turn on solid. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: vehicle to drift to the right or left. NOTE: • Always drive with each tire inflated to the Safety • If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW recommended cold tire inflation pressure. range, the “Hill Descent Control Indicator WARNING! Light” will flash for five seconds and HDC Economy will not be enabled. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven and can cause collisions. wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. • If the ESC senses that the brakes are • These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread overheating the “Hill Descent Control In- Under-inflation increases tire flexing and life resulting in a need for earlier tire replace- dicator Light” will flash for five seconds can result in over-heating and tire failure. ment. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling and HDC will become deactivated until • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. the brakes have cooled. cushion shock. Objects on the road and Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Disabling HDC chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and un- transfer case out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill comfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over- affect vehicle handling and can fail sud- Descent Control Indicator” light in the instru- inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and ment cluster will turn off. denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. (Continued) 255 NOTE: CAUTION! Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then • Unequal tire pressures from side to side After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- the cold tire inflation pressure should be in- may cause erratic and unpredictable sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi steering response. This will prevent moisture and dirt from en- (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may tering the valve stem, which could damage temperature condition. cause the vehicle to drift left or right. the valve stem. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi Tire Inflation Pressures (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed Inflation pressures specified on the placard are reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire on the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire pressure will be too low. driver’s side door. inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least Tire Pressures For High Speed At least once a month: three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) Operation • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- speeds and within posted speed limits. Where make a visual judgement when determining tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain- proper inflation. Tires may look properly in- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor- flated even when they are under-inflated. wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve- pressures vary with temperature changes. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible hicle loading may be required for high-speed damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for change. Keep this in mind when checking tire recommended safe operating speeds, loading pressure inside a garage, especially in the and cold tire inflation pressures. winter.

256 WARNING! Tire Repair all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling High speed driving with your vehicle under If your tire becomes damaged, it may be re- of your vehicle. maximum load is dangerous. The added paired if it meets the following criteria: Summer Or Three Season Tires — If strain on your tires could cause them to fail. • The tire has not been driven on when flat. Equipped You could have a serious collision. Do not • The damage is only on the tread section of Summer tires provide traction in both wet and drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca- your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). dry conditions, and are not intended to be pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is • " (120 km/h). The puncture is no greater than ¼ (6 mm). equipped with summer tires, be aware these Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs tires are not designed for winter or cold driving and additional information. conditions. For more information, contact a au- Radial Ply Tires thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that all season designation or mountain/snowflake have experienced a loss of pressure should be WARNING! symbol on the tire sidewall. replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire Combining radial ply tires with other types of of identical size and service description (Load Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle Index and Speed Code). do so may adversely affect the safety and to handle poorly. The instability could cause handling of your vehicle. a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets Tire Types Snow Tires of four. Never combine them with other types All Season Tires — If Equipped Some areas of the country require the use of of tires. All Season tires provide traction for all seasons snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on may vary between different all season tires. All the tire sidewall. season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use size and type to the original equipment tires.

257 Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do limited driving capabilities and needs to be Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire so may adversely affect the safety and handling replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not And Wheel — If Equipped of your vehicle. repairable. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded original equipment tire and wheel found on the than what was originally equipped with your at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire vehicle and should not be operated at sustained the run flat mode. may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds See the tire pressure monitoring section for If your vehicle has this option, refer to an above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original more information. authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire equipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec- rotation pattern. ommended safe operating speeds, loading and Spare Tires — If Equipped cold tire inflation pressures. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped NOTE: The compact spare is for temporary emergency While studded tires improve performance on For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead use only. You can identify if your vehicle is ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry of a spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” equipped with a compact spare by looking at surfaces may be poorer than that of non- the spare tire description on the Tire and Load- studded tires. Some states prohibit studded in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further ing Information Placard located on the driver’s tires; therefore, local laws should be checked information. side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. before using these tire types. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the CAUTION! Run Flat Tires — If Equipped letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive Because of the reduced ground clearance, Example: T145/80D18 103M. 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a do not take your vehicle through an auto- T, S = Temporary Spare Tire rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of matic car wash with a compact, full size or inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A limited-use temporary spare installed. Dam- Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation age to the vehicle may result. pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op- Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has portunity. 258 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount Full Size Spare — If Equipped WARNING! a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, The full size spare is for temporary emergency since the wheel is designed specifically for the use only. This tire may look like the originally Limited-use spares are for emergency use compact spare tire. Do not install more than one equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not any given time. limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the drive more than the speed listed on the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the WARNING! size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is cold tire inflation pressures listed on your not the same as your original equipment tire, Tire and Loading Information Placard lo- Compact spares are for temporary emer- replace (or repair) the original equipment tire cated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear gency use only. With these spares, do not and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu- drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo- nity. edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or rary use spares have limited tread life. When repair) the original equipment tire at the first Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, The limited-use spare tire is for temporary Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle the temporary use spare tire needs to be emergency use only. This tire is identified by a replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, label located on the limited-use spare wheel. control. which apply to your spare. Failure to do so This label contains the driving limitations for this could result in spare tire failure and loss of spare. This tire may look like the original Tire Spinning vehicle control. equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi- vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited- tions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds is not the same as your original equipment tire, continuously without stopping. replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu- Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To nity. Do In Emergencies” for further information.

259 WARNING! Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. varying factors including, but not limited to: Forces generated by excessive wheel • speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A Driving style tire could explode and injure someone. Do • Tire pressure not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than • Distance driven 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of continuously when you are stuck, and do not V or higher, and summer tires typically have let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires what the speed. 1 — Worn Tire per the vehicle maintenance schedule is 2 — New Tire highly recommended. Tread Wear Indicators WARNING! Tread wear indicators are in the original equip- These indicators are molded into the bottom of ment tires to help you in determining when your the tread grooves. They will appear as bands Tires and the spare tire should be replaced tires should be replaced. when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). after six years, regardless of the remaining When the tread is worn to the tread wear tread. Failure to follow this warning can indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to result in sudden tire failure. You could lose “Replacement Tires” in this section for further control and have a collision resulting in seri- information. ous injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

260 It is recommended you contact your authorized Replacement Tires WARNING! (Continued) The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any • of many characteristics. They should be in- questions you may have on tire specifications or Never use a tire with a smaller load index spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire capability. Failure to use equivalent replace- or capacity, other than what was originally inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly ment tires may adversely affect the safety, equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with recommends that you use tires equivalent to the handling, and ride of your vehicle. a smaller load index could result in tire originals in size, quality and performance when overloading and failure. You could lose replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph WARNING! control and have a collision. on “Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle having adequate speed capability can re- Certification Label for the size designation of than that specified for your vehicle. Some sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve- your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for combinations of unapproved tires and your tire will be found on the original equipment wheels may change suspension dimen- hicle control. tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example sions and performance characteristics, re- found in the Tire Safety Information section of sulting in changes to steering, handling, this manual for more information relating to the and braking of your vehicle. This can CAUTION! Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. cause unpredictable handling and stress Replacing original tires with tires of a differ- It is recommended to replace the two front tires to steering and suspension components. ent size may result in false speedometer and or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire You could lose control and have a collision odometer readings. can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If resulting in serious injury or death. Use you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the only the tire and wheel sizes with load wheel’s specifications match those of the origi- ratings approved for your vehicle. nal wheels. (Continued)

261 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) DEVICES) To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, • Observe the traction device manufactur- Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to- observe the following precautions: er’s instructions on the method of installa- body clearance. Follow these recommenda- • Because of restricted traction device clear- tion, operating speed, and conditions for tions to guard against damage. ance between tires and other suspension use. Always use the suggested operating • Traction device must be of proper size for the components, it is important that only trac- speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is tire, as recommended by the traction device tion devices in good condition are used. less than 30 mph (48 km/h). manufacturer. Broken devices can cause serious dam- • Do not use traction devices on a compact • Install on Rear Tires Only. age. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise spare tire. occurs that could indicate device break- • A 235/65R17 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S” age. Remove the damaged parts of the specification is recommended. device before further use. TIRE ROTATION • Install device as tightly as possible and RECOMMENDATIONS WARNING! then retighten after driving about ½ mile The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle (0.8 km). operate at different loads and perform different Using tires of different size and type (M+S, • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). steering, handling, and braking functions. For Snow) between front and rear axles can • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. cause unpredictable handling. You could and large bumps, especially with a loaded These effects can be reduced by timely rotation lose control and have a collision. vehicle. of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially • Do not drive for prolonged period on dry worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such pavement. as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, (Continued) and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. 262 Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the pressure will also increase as the vehicle is CAUTION! (Continued) proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for driven; this is normal and there should be no any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected in tire size can cause damage to the transfer adjustment for this increased pressure. prior to rotation being performed. case. Tire rotation schedule should be fol- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire lowed to balance tire wear. The suggested rotation method is the “forward- pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low cross” shown in the following diagram. pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR pressure loss through the tire. SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tire pressure as long as the condition exists, will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres- above recommended cold placard pressure. sure. Once the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale The tire pressure will vary with temperature by Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure about 1 psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). must be increased to the recommended cold This means that when the outside temperature placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. The Tire Rotation decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold system will automatically update and the “Tire inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extin- guish once the updated tire pressures have CAUTION! pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours, or driven less than been received. The vehicle may need to be Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Refer driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph depends on tires of equal size, type and to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting (24 km/h) to receive this information. circumference on each wheel. Any difference and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire (Continued) 263 NOTE: For example, your vehicle may have a recom- CAUTION! mended cold (parked for more than three hours) • The TPMS is not intended to replace nor- air pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient • The TPMS has been optimized for the mal tire care and maintenance, nor to temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured original equipment tires and wheels. The provide warning of a tire failure or condi- tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature TPMS pressures have been established tion. drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pres- for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. sure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire Undesirable system operation or sensor • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON damage may result when using replace- pressure gauge while adjusting your tire the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” ment equipment that is not of the same pressure. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket • Driving on a significantly under-inflated to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but wheels can cause sensor damage. Using tire causes the tire to overheat and can the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after and may affect the vehicle’s handling and sensor to become inoperable. After using the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s stopping ability. recommended cold placard pressure value. an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom- • mended that you take your vehicle to your The TPMS is not a substitute for proper local dealership to have your sensor func- tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire tion checked. pressure, even if under-inflation has not • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- reached the level to trigger illumination of sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale This will prevent moisture and dirt from Light.” entering the valve stem, which could dam- • Seasonal temperature changes will affect age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

264 Base System The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Light” will illuminate in the instrument flash on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain uses wireless technology with wheel rim cluster, a “Lo Tire” message will be on solid when a system fault is detected. The mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres- displayed in the odometer display at 3 system fault will also sound a chime. If the sure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as second intervals followed by the location(s) of ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure the low tire(s) (RR, LR, RF, LF) displayed for 3 providing the system fault still exists. A system readings to the Receiver Module. second intervals each. This sequence shall be fault can occur by any of the following sce- NOTE: repeated for two complete cycles for each igni- narios: tion “on” cycle. Following the second cycle, the It is particularly important for you to check 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving odometer display shall revert back to the prior the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly next to facilities emitting the same Radio Fre- display preceding the low tire message an and to maintain the proper pressure. quencies as the TPM sensors. "Inflate to XX" message will be displayed and an The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con- audible chime will be activated when one or 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window sists of the following components: more of the four active road tire pressures are tinting that affects radio wave signals. 1. Receiver Module low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or as possible, check the inflation pressure of each wheel housings. 2. Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 3. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. The 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the system will automatically update and the “Tire sensors. spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and “LOW matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly. TIRE” message will extinguish once the up- The matching full size spare tire can be used in dated tire pressures have been received. The place of any of the four road tires. A low spare tire vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this tale Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound information. while it is stored in the spare tire location.

265 NOTE: place of a road tire that has a pressure Premium System – If Equipped below the low-pressure warning limit, • If your vehicle is equipped with a match- The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime ing full size spare wheel and tire assem- uses wireless technology with wheel rim- will sound and the “Tire Pressure Moni- bly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sen- mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres- toring Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” sor, and can be monitored by the Tire sure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as message will turn ON. The ؆Inflate to XX؆ Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure message will also be displayed. After driv- the event that the matching full size spare readings to the Receiver Module. ing the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above tire is swapped with a low pressure road 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure tire, the next ignition key cycle will still Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- and off for 75 seconds and then remain on tale Light” to be ON, a “LOW TIRE” mes- solid. For each subsequent ignition key sage displayed for a minimum of five cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire -seconds, the ؆Inflate to XX؆ message dis Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will played and a chime to sound. Driving the flash on and off for 75 seconds and then vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph remain on solid. Once you repair or re- (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure place the original road tire, and reinstall it Monitoring Telltale Light” and “LOW on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, TIRE” message as long as none of the the TPMS will update automatically and road tires are below the low pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Display the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale warning threshold. Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire NOTE: • If your vehicle is not equipped with a pressure is below the low-pressure warn- It is particularly important, for you to regu- matching full size spare wheel and tire ing limit in any of the four active road larly check the tire pressure in all of your assembly, it does not have a tire pressure tires. The vehicle may need to be driven tires and to maintain the proper pressure. monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive pressure. If you install the spare tire in this information. 266 The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con- An “Inflate to XX” message and a graphic recommended cold tire pressure inflation value sists of the following components: display of the pressure value(s) with the low shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. The • Receiver Module tire(s) “flashing” will also be displayed. Refer to system will automatically update, the graphic “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” display of the pressure value(s) will stop “flash- • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for ing,” and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System further information. Light will extinguish once the updated tire pres- Messages, which display in the Electronic NOTE: sure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and a Your system can be set to display pressure 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. graphic displaying tire pressures units in PSI, kPa, or BAR. • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on the spare wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with solid when a system fault is detected. The a matching full-size spare wheel and tire as- system fault will also sound a chime. The EVIC sembly. The matching full-size spare tire can be will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes- used in place of any of the four road tires. sage for a minimum of five seconds. This mes- Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure sage is then followed by a graphic display, with Warnings “- -“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale being received. Light will illuminate in the instrument Tire Pressure Monitor Display NOTE: cluster, and an audible chime will be Should a low tire condition occur on any of the Your system can be set to display pressure activated, when one or more of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon units in PSI, kPa, or BAR. four active road tire pressures are low. In addi- as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is tion, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRES- “flashing” on the graphic display to the vehicle’s SURE” message for a minimum of five seconds. 267 If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will pressure values still shown. This indicates the • If your vehicle is not equipped with a repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If pressure values are still being received from the matching full-size spare wheel and tire the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the assembly, it does not have a tire pressure Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer correct vehicle position. However, the system monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message still needs to be serviced as long as the "SER- TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire will not be present, and a pressure value will be VICE TPM SYSTEM" message exists. pressure. If you install the spare tire in displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can NOTE: place of a road tire that has a pressure occur by any of the following: below the low-pressure warning limit, • 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving If your vehicle is equipped with a match- upon the next ignition switch cycle, the next to facilities emitting the same Radio Fre- ing full-size spare wheel and tire assem- “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” quencies as the TPM sensors. bly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sen- will remain ON, a chime will sound, and sor, and can be monitored by the Tire the EVIC will still display the ؆Inflate to Installing some form of aftermarket window Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In XX؆ message and a “flashing” pressure .2 tinting that affects radio wave signals. the event that the matching full-size spare value in the graphic display. After driving 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or tire is swapped with a low pressure road the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above wheel housings. tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. tale Light” to be ON, a chime to sound, a and off for 75 seconds and then remain on 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message to ap- solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a sensors. pear in the EVIC, and the graphic display “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM؆ message for a -will still show the ؆Inflate to XX؆ message minimum of five seconds and then dis " The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM and the low tire pressure value “flashing.” play dashes (- -) in place of the pressure " SYSTEM message for a minimum of five sec- Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes value. For each subsequent ignition onds when a system fault is detected possibly above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire related to an incorrect sensor location fault. In “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will " " this case, the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes- as long as none of road tires are below flash on and off for 75 seconds and then sage is then followed by a graphic display, with the low pressure warning threshold. remain on solid, and the EVIC will display 268 — a ؆SERVICE TPM SYSTEM؆ message for a not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring FUEL REQUIREMENTS minimum of five seconds and then dis- (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 play dashes (- -) in place of the pressure minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS GASOLINE ENGINES value. will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on This engine is designed to meet all emissions Once you repair or replace the original road and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and regulations and provide excellent fuel economy tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center and performance when using high quality un- the spare tire, the TPMS will update auto- (EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS- leaded gasoline with a minimum research oc- matically. TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in tane rating (RON) of 91. The use of premium place of the pressure values. Beginning with the gasoline will not provide any benefit over regu- In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- lar gasoline in these engines. tale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no EVIC will display a new pressure value instead longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not SYSTEM” message in the EVIC but dashes (--) of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is harmful to your engine. However, continued will remain in place of the pressure values. below the low-pressure warning limit in any of heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause the four active road tires. The vehicle may need To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel damage, and immediate service is required. to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you information. vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph experience these symptoms, try another brand (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale of gasoline before considering service for the TPMS Deactivation Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then vehicle. The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all turn off, and the Electronic Vehicle Information four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with Center (EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPM wheel and tire assemblies that do not have SYSTEM” message. The EVIC will also display TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter pressure values in place of the dashes. On the wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To next ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four SYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed as wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires long as no system fault exists.

269 Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide have CAUTION! CAUTION! issued and endorsed consistent gasoline speci- fications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) Do not use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than which define fuel properties necessary to de- Use of these blends may result in starting 10% may result in engine malfunction, start- liver enhanced emissions, performance, and and drivability problems and may damage ing and operating difficulties, and materials durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer critical fuel system components. degradation. These adverse effects could recommends the use of gasoline that meets the result in permanent damage to your vehicle. WWFC specifications if they are available. Ethanol Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer recommends that your ve- Clean Air Gasoline as hard starting, stalling and stumble. If you hicle be operated on fuel containing no more Many gasolines are now being blended that experience these problems, try another brand than 10% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from a contribute to cleaner air, especially in those of gasoline before considering service for the reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex- areas where air pollution levels are high. These vehicle. ceeding this 10% limit and/or of receiving fuel new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and Methanol with abnormal properties. It should also be some are referred to as “reformulated gasoline.” noted that an increase in fuel consumption (Methyl) is used in a variety of concentrations should be expected when using ethanol- The manufacturer supports these efforts toward when blended with unleaded gasoline. You may blended fuels, due to the lower energy content cleaner air. You can help by using these blends find fuels containing 3% or more methanol as they become available. of ethanol. Problems that result from using along with other alcohols called cosolvents. methanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol blends are Problems that result from using methanol/ MMT In Gasoline not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While gasoline are not the responsibility of the manu- MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tri- MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it facturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made carbonyl) is a manganese containing metallic does not have the negative effects of Methanol. from Methanol, it does not have the negative additive that is blended into some gasoline to effects of Methanol. increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

270 MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles. The manufac- Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is • Keep the swing gate closed when driving turer recommends that gasoline without MMT deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre- your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of vent carbon monoxide poisoning: and other poisonous exhaust gases from gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain entering the vehicle. pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline carbon monoxide, a colorless and odor- retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains less gas which can kill. Never run the MMT. engine in a closed area, such as a garage, FUEL REQUIREMENTS — Materials Added to Fuel and never sit in a parked vehicle with the DIESEL ENGINES Besides using unleaded gasoline with the engine running for an extended period. If Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane proper octane rating, gasolines that contain the vehicle is stopped in an open area with rating of 50 or higher, and meeting the EN590 detergents, corrosion and stability additives are the engine running for more than a short standard are highly recommended. See your recommended. Using gasolines that have these period, adjust the ventilation system to authorized dealer for further information regard- additives will help improve fuel economy, re- force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. ing fuels available in your area. duce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor- • Guard against carbon monoxide with mance. proper maintenance. Have the exhaust Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning system inspected every time the vehicle is agents should be avoided. Many of these ma- raised. Have any abnormal conditions re- terials intended for gum and varnish removal paired promptly. Until repaired, drive with may contain active solvents or similar ingredi- all side windows fully open. ents. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. (Continued)

271 3. Rotate the ignition key back to the left to ADDING FUEL WARNING! remove. • Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas 4. To replace the cap, insert it into the filler neck cap) slowly to prevent fuel spray from the The locking gas cap is located on the left side of and tighten to the right until at least three clicks filler neck, which may cause injury. the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be are heard. sure the replacement cap is the correct one for • The volatility of some gasolines may cause this vehicle. a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that CAUTION! may increase while you drive. This pres- • Damage to the fuel system or emissions sure can result in a spray of gasoline control system could result from using an and/or vapors when the cap is removed improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap • A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities slowly allows the pressure to vent and into the fuel system. prevents fuel spray. • A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the • Never have any smoking materials lit in or Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn near the vehicle when the gas cap is on. removed or the tank is being filled. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the Fuel Filler Cap “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the engine is running. fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel • 1. Turn off engine. A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into tank is full. a portable container that is inside of a 2. Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap and vehicle. You could be burned. Always turn the key one-quarter turn to the right, then place gas containers on the ground while rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove. filling.

272 NOTE: TRAILER TOWING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you weight of all cargo, consumables and equip- the fuel tank is full. ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before • the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" Tighten the gas cap until you hear a towing a trailer, carefully review this information condition. The recommended way to measure “clicking” sound. This is an indication to tow your load as efficiently and safely as GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a that the gas cap is tightened properly. The possible. MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer if the gas cap is not secured properly. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty must be supported by the scale. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened coverage, follow the requirements and recom- Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) each time the vehicle is refueled. mendations in this manual concerning vehicles The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your used for trailer towing. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message (gASCAP) vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic Common Towing Definitions Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) system can determine if the fuel filler cap is The following trailer towing related definitions The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. will assist you in understanding the following and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front If the system detects a malfunction, the “gAS- information: and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do CAP” message will display in the odometer dis- not exceed either front or rear GAWR. play. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your properly tightened. Press the odometer reset but- vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, WARNING! ton to turn the message off. If the problem per- cargo, and tongue weight. The total load must It is important that you do not exceed the sists, the message will appear the next time the be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged driving condition can result if either rating is cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the exceeded. You could lose control of the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light vehicle and have an accident. off. 273 Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Distributing Hitch The recommended location for attaching the The tongue weight is the downward force ex- A weight-distributing system works by applying normal trailer’s breakaway cable is in the erted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most leverage through spring (load) bars. They are stamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitch cases, it should not be less than 10% of the typically used for heavier loads, to distribute receiver. trailer load. You must consider tongue load as trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front With Attachment Point part of the load on your vehicle. axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in ac- • For detachable tow bar, pass the cable Frontal Area cordance with the manufacturers directions, it through the attachment point and clip it back The frontal area is the maximum height multi- provides for a more level ride, offering more onto itself. plied by the maximum width of the front of a consistent steering and brake control thereby trailer. enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens Trailer Sway Control sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer can be installed between the hitch receiver and stability. Trailer sway control and a weight dis- the trailer tongue that typically provides adjust- tributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom- able friction associated with the telescoping mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying may be required depending on Vehicle and motions while traveling. Trailer configuration / loading to comply with Weight-Carrying Hitch gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements. A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located Breakaway Cable Attachment Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method European braking regulations for braked trailers at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of up to 7,700 lbs (3,500 kg) require trailers to be the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most fitted with either a secondary coupling or break- popular on the market today and they are away cable. commonly used to tow small- and medium- sized trailers.

274 • For fixed ball tow bar, attach the clip directly Without Attachment Points • For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable around to the designated point. This alternative must • For detachable ball tow bar, you must follow the neck of the tow ball. If you fit the cable be specifically permitted by the trailer manu- the recommended manufacturer or supplier like this, use a single loop only. facturer since the clip may not be sufficiently procedure. strong for use in this way.

Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method

275 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission Model Axle Ratio Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note) 3.6L/Manual Sport & Sahara 3.21 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg) Two-Door 3.6L/Manual Sport & Sahara 3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg) Two-Door 3.6L/Automatic Sport & Sahara 3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg) Two-Door 2.8L/Manual Sport & Sahara 3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg) Two-Door 2.8L/Automatic Sport & Sahara 3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg) Two-Door 3.6L/Manual Rubicon Two-Door 4.10 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg) 3.6L/Automatic Rubicon Two-Door 4.10 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg) 3.6L/Manual Sport Four-Door 3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg) 3.6L/Automatic Sport & Sahara 3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg) Four-Door 2.8L/Manual Sport & Sahara 3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg) Four-Door

276 Engine/Transmission Model Axle Ratio Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note) 2.8L/Automatic Sport & Sahara 3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg) Four-Door 3.6L/Manual Rubicon Four- 4.10 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg) Door 3.6L/Automatic Rubicon Four- 4.10 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg) Door Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 mph (100 km/h) unless local laws require a lower speed.

NOTE: sway severely side to side which will cause loss NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be consid- of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to Remember that everything put into or on the ered as part of the combined weight of load trailers heavier in front is the cause of trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, occupants and cargo, and should never ex- many trailer accidents. additional factory-installed options, or ceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Never exceed the maximum tongue weight dealer-installed options, must be consid- Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires stamped on your trailer hitch. ered as part of the total load on your vehicle. – General Information” in “Starting and Op- Refer to the Tire and Loading Information erating” for further information. Consider the following items when computing placard, located on the drivers door pillar, the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: for the maximum combined weight of occu- Trailer And Tongue Weight • The tongue weight of the trailer. pants and cargo for your vehicle. Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the • The weight of any other type of cargo or Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of equipment put in or on your vehicle. your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels • The weight of the driver and all passengers. or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to

277 Towing Requirements WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle • • drivetrain components, the following guidelines Make certain that the load is secured in the Vehicles with trailers should not be parked are recommended: trailer and will not shift during travel. When on a grade. When parking, apply the park- trailering cargo that is not fully secured, ing brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow CAUTION! dynamic load shifts can occur that may be vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. difficult for the driver to control. You could Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first lose control of your vehicle and have an • GCWR must not be exceeded. 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is accident. • Total weight must be distributed be- driven. The engine, axle or other parts • All trailer hitches should be professionally tween the tow vehicle and the trailer could be damaged. installed on your vehicle. such that the following four ratings are • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not exceeded: that a trailer is towed, do not drive over not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over- 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts 1. GVWR loading can cause a loss of control, poor at full throttle. This helps the engine and performance or damage to the brakes, 2. GTW other parts of the vehicle wear in at the axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus- heavier loads. 3. GAWR pension, chassis structure or tires. • Safety chains must always be used be- 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. WARNING! tween your vehicle and trailer. Always con- nect the chains to the frame or hook re- Improper towing can lead to an injury acci- tainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the Towing Requirements – Tires dent. Follow these guidelines to make your chains under the trailer tongue and allow • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a trailer towing as safe as possible: enough slack for turning corners. compact spare tire. (Continued) (Continued) 278 • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential • When towing a trailer equipped with a hy- WARNING! (Continued) for the safe and satisfactory operation of your draulic surge actuated brake system, an vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Informa- electronic brake controller is not required. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping tion” in “Starting and Operating” for proper distance. When towing, you should allow for • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers tire inflation procedures. additional space between your vehicle and over 1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation trailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (750 kg). the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so pressures before trailer usage. could result in an accident. • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire CAUTION! Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And damage before towing a trailer. Refer to If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Wiring (450 kg) loaded, it should have its own Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the Operating” for the proper inspection brakes and they should be of adequate procedure. trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the capacity. Failure to do this could lead to trailer are required for motoring safety. • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – Gen- accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake The Trailer Tow Package may includea7ora eral Information” in “Starting and Operating” pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. for proper tire replacement procedures. Re- 13–pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved placing tires with a higher load carrying ca- trailer harness and connector. pacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR WARNING! NOTE: and GAWR limits. Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi- Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes wiring harness. cle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys- your brake system and cause it to fail. You The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with might not have brakes when you need trailer connector. that of the trailer. This could cause inad- them and could have an accident. equate braking and possible personal injury. (Continued) 279 Pin Number Function Wire Color 5 Right Rear Brown Position, Side Marker Lights, and Rear Regis- tration Plate Illumination Device. b 6 Stop Lights Red Pin Number Function Wire Color 7 Left Rear Black Pin Number Function Wire Color 1 Left Turn Yellow Position, 1 Left Turn Yellow Signal Side Signal Marker 2 Rear Fog Blue Lights, and 2 Rear Fog Blue Light Rear Regis- Light 3 Ground/ White tration Plate 3 a Ground/ White Common Illumination Common Return Device. b Return for 4 Right Turn Green b The rear position registration plate illumi- Contacts Signal nation device shall be connected such that (Pins) 1 no light of the device has a common con- and 2 and nection with both pins 5 and 7. 4to8

280 Pin Number Function Wire Color Pin Number Function Wire Color Pin Number Function Wire Color 4 Right Turn Green 8 Reverse Red/Black 13 a Return for White Signal lights Contact 5 Right Rear Brown 9 Permanent Brown/White (Pin) 9 Position, Power Sup- Note: The allocation pin 12 has been Side ply (+12V) changed from “Coding for coupled Trailer” to Marker 10 Power Sup- Red “Reserve for Future Allocation.” Lights, and ply Con- a The three return circuits shall not be con- Rear Regis- trolled by nected electrically in the trailer. tration Plate Ignition b The rear position registration plate illumi- Illumination Switch Device. b nation device shall be connected such that (+12V) no light of the device has a common con- 6 Stop Lights Red 11 a Return for White nection with both pins 5 and 7. 7 Left Rear Black Contact Position, (Pin) 10 Side 12 Reserve for Red/Blue Marker Future Allo- Lights, and cation Rear Regis- tration Plate Illumination Device. b

281 Towing Tips If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped 45 minutes of continuous operation, then Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. stopping and backing the trailer in an area away change the transmission fluid and filter as from heavy traffic. specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent • When using the speed control, if you experi- trailer towing." Refer to the “Maintenance ence speed drops greater than 10 mph Manual Transmission — If Equipped Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer to cruising speed. towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid NOTE: excessive clutch slippage. Check the automatic transmission fluid level • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped before towing (gasoline engine only). The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. AutoStick® Cooling System The transmission controls include a drive strat- To reduce potential for engine and transmission • When using the AutoStick® shift control, se- egy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. overheating, take the following actions: lect the highest gear that allows for adequate However, if frequent shifting does occur while in performance and avoids frequent downshifts. City Driving DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick® shift control For example, choose “4” if the desired speed to manually select a lower gear. When stopped for short periods of time, shift the can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if transmission into NEUTRAL and increase en- NOTE: needed to maintain the desired speed. gine idle speed. Using a lower gear while operating the ve- • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid Highway Driving hicle under heavy loading conditions will continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce improve performance and extend transmis- vehicle speed as necessary to avoid ex- Reduce speed. sion life by reducing excessive shifting and tended driving at high RPM. Return to a Air Conditioning heat build up. This action will also provide higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and better engine braking. road conditions allow. Turn off temporarily.

282 Trailer Hitch Attaching Points Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow Overhang Dimensions a trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow hitch must be attached to your vehicle using the A N/A provided attaching points on the vehicle’s B N/A frame. Refer to the following chart to determine the accurate attaching points. Other equipment, C N/A such as trailer sway controls and braking equip- D (maximum 2.47 ft. (754 mm) ment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equipment overhang) and low profile mirrors, may also be required or E 3.39 ft. (1032 mm) strongly recommended. F 0.16 ft. (50 mm)

283 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models See Instructions • Automatic transmission in PARK • Manual transmission in gear (NOT in Flat Tow NONE NEUTRAL [N]) • Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) • Tow in forward direction Front NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK

284 Recreational Towing — Four — CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! Wheel Drive Models • Before recreational towing, perform the You or others could be injured or killed if you NOTE: procedure outlined under “Shifting Into leave the vehicle unattended with the trans- The transfer case must be shifted into NEU- NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the trans- fer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position with- TRAL (N), automatic transmission must be fer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Other- out first fully engaging the parking brake. The in PARK, and manual transmission must be wise, internal damage will result. transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disen- in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational • Towing this vehicle in violation of the gages both the front and rear driveshafts towing. above requirements can cause severe from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle transmission and/or transfer case dam- to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. CAUTION! age. Damage from improper towing is not The parking brake should always be applied • DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Inter- covered under the New Vehicle Limited when the driver is not in the vehicle. nal damage to the transmission or transfer Warranty. case will occur if a dolly is used when • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on recreational towing. tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face CAUTION! • Tow only in the forward direction. Towing bar will be damaged. It is necessary to follow these steps to be this vehicle backwards can cause severe certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU- damage to the transfer case. Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) TRAL (N) before recreational towing to pre- • Automatic transmissions must be placed in Use the following procedure to prepare your vent damage to internal parts. PARK for recreational towing. vehicle for recreational towing. • Manual transmissions must be placed in 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. gear (not in Neutral) for recreational tow- ing. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

(Continued) 285 3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEU- CAUTION! 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN po- TRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manual sition, but do not start the engine. transmission. Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the 6. Press and hold the brake pedal. 4. Turn the engine OFF. transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the en- 7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEU- gine running. With the transfer case in NEU- 8. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired TRAL (N). TRAL (N) ensure that the engine is OFF position. 6. Start the engine. before shifting the transmission into PARK. NOTE: 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. When shifting the transfer case out of NEU- 13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a TRAL (N), turning the engine OFF may be 8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal suitable tow bar. on manual transmissions) for five seconds and required to avoid gear clash. ensure that there is no vehicle movement. 14. Release the parking brake. 9. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, 9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic trans- 15. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and or place manual transmission in Neutral. mission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first secure it away from the negative battery post. 10. Release the brake pedal. gear. Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N) 11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. 10. Turn the engine OFF and leave the ignition Use the following procedure to prepare your switch in the unlocked ACC position. vehicle for normal usage. 12. Start the engine. 11. Firmly apply the parking brake. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving 13. Press and hold the brake pedal. it connected to the tow vehicle. 12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place 14. Release the parking brake. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. manual transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). 15. Shift the transmission into gear, release the 3. Reconnect the negative battery cable. brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual trans- 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- missions), and check that the vehicle operates tion. normally. 286 6

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...... 288 • IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...... 288 • WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ...... 289 • Torque Specifications ...... 289 • JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...... 290 • Jack Location ...... 290 • Spare Tire Removal ...... 291 • Preparations For Jacking ...... 291 • Jacking Instructions ...... 291 • Road Tire Installation...... 293 • JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES...... 294 • Preparations For Jump-Start ...... 294 • Jump-Starting Procedure ...... 295 • FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...... 296 • TOW EYES ...... 297 • SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ...... 298 • TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...... 299 • Without The Ignition Key ...... 300 • Four–Wheel Drive Models ...... 300

287 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS NOTE: The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located In any of the following situations, you can There are steps that you can take to slow on the instrument panel below the climate reduce the potential for overheating by taking down an impending overheat condition: controls. the appropriate action. • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it Press the switch to turn on the Hazard • On the highways — slow down. off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the Warning flasher. When the switch is • In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmis- A/C off can help remove this heat. activated, all directional turn signals sion into NEUTRAL, but do not increase • will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of engine idle speed. You can also turn the temperature control an emergency. Press the switch a second time to maximum heat, the mode control to to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. floor and the blower control to high. This CAUTION! This is an emergency warning system and it allows the heater core to act as a supple- should not be used when the vehicle is in Driving with a hot cooling system could dam- ment to the radiator and aids in removing motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge heat from the engine cooling system. it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the ve- hicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis- WARNING! tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will con- turned off until the pointer drops back into the You or others can be badly burned by hot tinue to operate even though the ignition is normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from placed in the OFF position. (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn your radiator. If you see or hear steam com- the engine off immediately, and call for ser- NOTE: ing from under the hood, do not open the vice. With extended use the Hazard Warning hood until the radiator has had time to cool. flashers may wear down your battery. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

288 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or SPECIFICATIONS loose particles. Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re- moved and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. Torque Specifications Torque Patterns Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Lug Nut/ After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt Torque Nut/Bolt Bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are Size Socket Wheel Mounting Surface properly seated against the wheel. Size Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until 100 Ft-Lbs 1/2”x20 19mm each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. WARNING! (135 N·m) To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the **Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/ jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow tightening. this warning may result in personal injury.

289 NOTE: JACKING AND TIRE WARNING! (Continued) Turn the black plastic wing nut counter CHANGING • The jack is designed to be used as a tool clockwise to loosen the jack from the stor- for changing tires only. The jack should not age bin. WARNING! be used to lift the vehicle for service pur- • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side poses. The vehicle should be jacked on a of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery far enough off the road to avoid the danger areas. of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Jack Location • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger- The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and storage compartment. fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center Jack Wing Nut where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.

(Continued)

Jack Storage

290 Spare Tire Removal 4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, Jacking Instructions To remove the spare tire from the carrier, re- or a manual transmission into REVERSE. move the tire cover, if equipped, and remove 5. Turn the ignition to LOCK. WARNING! the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise. Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to NOTE: 6. Block both the front your vehicle: and rear of the wheel If you have added aftermarket accessories • Always park on a firm, level surface as far to the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot diagonally opposite of from the edge of the roadway as possible exceed a gross weight of 50 lbs (23 kg) the jacking position. For including the weight of the spare tire. example, if changing before raising the vehicle. the right front tire, block • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. Preparations For Jacking the left rear wheel. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the 1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or wheel to be raised. slippery areas. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an NOTE: automatic transmission in PARK; a manual Passengers should not remain in the vehicle WARNING! transmission in REVERSE. when the vehicle is being jacked. • Never start or run the engine with the Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of vehicle on a jack. the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it enough off the road to avoid being hit when is on a jack. operating the jack or changing the wheel. (Continued) 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 3. Set the parking brake.

291 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! 4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you a jack. If you need to get under a raised on locations other than those indicated in the are sure the jack is fully engaged. vehicle, take it to a service center where it Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated 1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from and for lifting this vehicle during a tire the stored location. change. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug • If working on or near a roadway, be ex- nuts by turning them to the left one turn while tremely careful of motor traffic. the wheel is still on the ground. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, 3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Con- are securely stowed, spares must be nect the jack handle driver to the extension, stowed with the valve stem facing the then to the lug wrench. ground. Rear Jacking Location NOTE: Block the opposite tire you are changing, if it is the drivers rear then block the passenger front.

Jack Warning Label

292 6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. WARNING! 7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts collision or hard stop, could endanger the clockwise. occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places WARNING! provided. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the Road Tire Installation vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. Front Jacking Location this warning may result in personal injury. 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw tighten the lug nuts. just clears the surface and enough clearance is to the left, and remove the jack. obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire 9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on WARNING! lift provides maximum stability. the wrench while tightening for increased lever- age. Alternate nuts until each nut has been To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the WARNING! tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifica- jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can tions” in this section for correct lug nut torque. vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow make the vehicle less stable and cause a 10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel this warning may result in personal injury. collision. It could slip off the jack and hurt blocks. someone near it. Raise the vehicle only 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning 11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their enough to remove the tire. the jack handle counterclockwise. proper locations.

293 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on NOTE: Preparations For Jump-Start the wrench while at the end of the handle for When using a portable battery booster pack The battery in your vehicle is located in the right increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc- rear of the engine compartment, behind the star pattern until each nut has been tightened tions and precautions. Power Distribution Center. twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If in doubt CAUTION! about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer Do not use a portable battery booster pack or or service station. any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all the battery, starter motor, alternator or elec- lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. trical system may occur. JUMP-STARTING WARNING! PROCEDURES Positive Battery Post Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause battery in another vehicle or by using a portable personal injury. WARNING! battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dan- • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan gerous if done improperly so please follow the whenever the hood is raised. It can start procedures in this section carefully. anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

(Continued)

294 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! battery, park the vehicle within the jumper • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, cables reach, set the parking brake and make Failure to follow these procedures could re- watch bands and bracelets that could sure the ignition is OFF. sult in damage to the charging system of the make an inadvertent electrical contact. booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. You could be seriously injured. WARNING! • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper burn your skin or eyes and generate hy- cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged this could establish a ground connection and drogen gas which is flammable and explo- vehicle. personal injury could result. sive. Keep open flames or sparks away 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) from the battery. jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the Jump-Starting Procedure booster battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper transmission into PARK (manual transmission WARNING! cable to the negative (-) post of the booster in NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to LOCK. Failure to follow this procedure could result battery. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces- in personal injury or property damage due to 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) sary electrical accessories. battery explosion. jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

295 WARNING! 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the Do not connect the jumper cable to the If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or booster battery. snow, it can often be moved using a rocking negative (-) post of the discharged battery. 9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to The resulting electrical spark could cause cable from the positive (+) post of the dis- clear the area around the front wheels. Then the battery to explode and could result in charged vehicle. shift back and forth between DRIVE and RE- personal injury. Only use the specific ground If frequent jump-starting is required to start your VERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd point, do not use any other exposed metal vehicle you should have the battery and charg- gear and REVERSE (with manual transmis- parts. ing system inspected at your authorized dealer. sion), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the CAUTION! that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine. booster battery, let the engine idle a few min- Accessories plugged into the vehicle power utes, and then start the engine in the vehicle outlets draw power from the vehicle’s bat- with the discharged battery. CAUTION! tery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular Once the engine is started, remove the jumper phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long Racing the engine or spinning the wheels cables in the reverse sequence: enough without engine operation, the vehi- may lead to transmission overheating and 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable cle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to de- failure. Allow the engine to idle with the from the engine ground of the vehicle with the grade battery life and/or prevent the engine transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one discharged battery. from starting. minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the reduce the risk of transmission failure during booster battery. prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

296 NOTE: WARNING! CAUTION! Press the ؆ESC Off؆ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to ؆Partial Off؆ mode, before rocking the ve- Forces generated by excessive wheel rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not hicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in speeds may cause damage, or even failure, use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or high- “Starting And Operating” for further infor- of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and way towing. You could damage your vehicle. mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s Tow straps are recommended when towing -press the ؆ESC Off؆ switch again to restore wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for the vehicle; chains may cause vehicle dam ؆ ؆ ESC On mode. longer than 30 seconds continuously without age. stopping when you are stuck and do not let CAUTION! anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting what the speed. WARNING! between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph eyes. Tow straps and chains may break, (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may re- TOW EYES causing serious injury. sult. Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes, which • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels are mounted in the front and the rear. too fast may lead to transmission over- heating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans- mission shifting occurring).

297 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever can- brake pedal. not be moved out of the PARK position, you can 6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the use the following procedure to temporarily access port, and push and hold the override move the shift lever: release lever down. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL posi- 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. tion. 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, 8. The vehicle may then be started in NEU- remove the shift lever override access cover TRAL. (located to the right of the shift lever). 9. Reinstall the shift lever override access 4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN cover. position, but do not start the engine.

Shift Lever Override Access Cover

298 TOWING A DISABLED operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the VEHICLE “Starting And Operating” section. This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS See instructions under “Recreational Towing” • Automatic Transmission in PARK Flat Tow NONE • Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in Neutral) • Transfer Case in NEUTRAL • Tow in forward direction Front NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to pers or associated brackets. State and local If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow laws regarding vehicles under tow must be “Shift Lever Override” in this section for instruc- bars and other equipment designed for this observed. tions on shifting the automatic transmission out purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s If you must use the accessories (wipers, de- of PARK for towing. instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC structural members of the vehicle, not to bum- position.

299 CAUTION! If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be Do not use sling type equipment when tow- towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels ing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEU- truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen- TRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (for sion components. Damage to your vehicle automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT in may result from improper towing. NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operat- ing” for detailed instructions. Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is CAUTION! towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. • The only approved method of towing without the Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. ignition key is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing Internal damage to the transmission or equipment is necessary to prevent damage to transfer case will occur if a front or rear the vehicle. wheel lift is used when towing. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the Four–Wheel Drive Models above requirements can cause severe The manufacturer recommends towing with all transmission and/or transfer case dam- wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one age. Damage from improper towing is not end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end covered under the New Vehicle Limited on a towing dolly. Warranty.

300 7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ...... 303 • ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.8L DIESEL ...... 304 • ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...... 305 • Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ...... 305 • REPLACEMENT PARTS ...... 305 • MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...... 305 • Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine ...... 306 • Engine Oil — Diesel Engine ...... 307 • Engine Oil Filter ...... 308 • Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...... 308 • Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 308 • Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 309 • Body Lubrication ...... 310 • Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 310 • Adding Washer Fluid ...... 311 • Exhaust System ...... 311 • Cooling System ...... 312 • Brake System ...... 316 • Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 317

301 • Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 319 • Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) — If Equipped . .319 • Transfer Case ...... 320 • Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...... 320 • Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion ...... 320 • FUSES ...... 325 • Totally Integrated Power Module ...... 325 • VEHICLE STORAGE ...... 330 • REPLACEMENT BULBS ...... 330 • BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 331 • Headlamp ...... 331 • Front Park/Turn Signal ...... 331 • Front Side Marker ...... 331 • Front Fog Lamp ...... 332 • Rear Fog Lamp ...... 332 • Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp ...... 332 • Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) ...... 332 • FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 333 • FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS ...... 334 • Engine ...... 334 • Chassis ...... 335

302 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 — Battery 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover) 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

303 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.8L DIESEL

1 — Battery 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick 3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

304 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC CAUTION! next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is SYSTEM — OBD II • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could detected twice in a row, the system will turn on Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated cause further damage to the emission con- the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This trol system. It could also affect fuel off. system monitors the performance of the emis- economy and driveability. The vehicle sions, engine, and automatic transmission con- must be serviced before any emissions REPLACEMENT PARTS trol systems. When these systems are operat- tests can be performed. ing properly, your vehicle will provide excellent Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/ • performance and fuel economy, as well as If the MIL is flashing while the engine is scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly engine emissions well within current govern- running, severe catalytic converter dam- recommended to ensure the designed perfor- ment regulations. age and power loss will soon occur. Imme- mance. Damage or failures caused by the use diate service is required. of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and If any of these systems require service, the repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Limited Warranty. Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnos- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message tic codes and other information to assist your After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic sys- MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES service technician in making repairs. Although tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is possi- The pages that follow contain the required your vehicle will usually be drivable and not bly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A maintenance services determined by the engi- need towing, see your authorized dealer for “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the neers who designed your vehicle. service as soon as possible. odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas Besides those maintenance items specified in cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer the fixed “Maintenance Schedule”, there are reset button to turn the message off. If the other components which may require servicing problem persists, the message will appear the or replacement in the future.

305 Change Engine Oil CAUTION! Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or Checking Oil Level proper maintenance intervals. perform repairs and service when neces- To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s Engine Oil Selection — Non ACEA sary could result in more costly repairs, engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The engine oil level should be Categories damage to other components or negatively checked five minutes after a warmed up engine For best performance and maximum protection impact vehicle performance. Immediately has been shut off. under all types of operating conditions, the have potential malfunctions examined by manufacturer only recommend engine oils that an authorized dealer or qualified repair Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level are API certified and meet the requirements of ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level center. Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. readings. Always maintain the oil level within • Your vehicle has been built with improved the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine fluids that protect the performance and quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of Oil Identification Symbol durability of your vehicle and also allow the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top extended maintenance intervals. Do not of the safe zone on these engines. This symbol means use chemical flushes in these components that the oil has as the chemicals can damage your engine, CAUTION! been certified by the American Pe- transmission, power steering or air condi- Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will tioning. Such damage is not covered by troleum Institute cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This (API). The manu- the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a could damage your engine. facturer only rec- flush is needed because of component ommends API Cer- malfunction, use only the specified fluid for tified engine oils. the flushing procedure.

306 CAUTION! MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to 1 U.S. Quart (0.95 L) of oil when the reading is Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 or Fiat at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on Do not use chemical flushes in your engine 9.55535-CR1 may be used when SAE 5W-20 these engines. oil as the chemicals can damage your en- engine oil is not available. Engine Oil Selection — 2.8L Diesel Engine gine. Such damage is not covered by the Engine Oil — Diesel Engine Use only Diesel Engine Oils conforming to New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chrysler Material Standard MS-11106 or Fiat Checking Oil Level 9.55535-S1 or Fiat 9.55535-S3 that also meet Engine Oil Selection — ACEA Categories To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine the requirements of ACEA C3. For countries that use the ACEA European Oil oil must be maintained at the correct level. Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.8L Diesel Engine Categories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate you use engine oils that meet the requirements every fuel stop. Filter (DPF), we recommend you use 5W-30 of ACEA C3 and approved to Chrysler MS-6395 For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate ESP full synthetic, low ash oil that meets the or Fiat 9.55535–CR1. Filter (DPF), it is acceptable to have an oil level requirements of Chrysler Material Standard Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE GRADE) up to 3/8 inch (10 mm) above the MAX line. MS-11106, or Fiat 9.55535-S3. MOPAR® 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for Beyond 3/8 inch (10 mm) it is recommended to For vehicles that are not equipped with a Diesel all operating temperatures. This engine oil im- change the oil. Particulate Filter (DPF), we recommend you proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel The best time to check the engine oil level is use 0W-40 ESP full synthetic engine oil that economy. about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom- shut off. Synthetic Engine Oils mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level You may use synthetic engine oils provided the information on engine oil filler cap location, refer ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level recommended oil quality requirements are met, to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and the recommended maintenance intervals Vehicle” for further information. and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding for oil and filter changes are followed.

307 Materials Added To Engine Oils used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are Do not add any supplemental materials, other engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and a high quality filter and are recommended. than leak detection dyes, to the engine oil. are recommended. Engine oil is an engineered product and its Maintenance-Free Battery performance may be impaired by supplemental Engine Air Cleaner Filter Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance- additives. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the free battery. You will never have to add water, proper maintenance intervals. nor is periodic maintenance required. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used WARNING! WARNING! engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can etc.) can provide a measure of protection in sories contain lead and lead compounds. present a problem to the environment. Contact the case of engine backfire. Do not remove Always wash hands after handling the bat- your authorized dealer, service station or gov- the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, tery. ernmental agency for advice on how and where etc.) unless such removal is necessary for used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before CAUTION! Engine Oil Filter starting the vehicle with the air induction It is essential when replacing the cables on The engine oil filter should be replaced with a system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. the battery that the positive cable is attached new filter at every engine oil change. Failure to do so can result in serious per- to the positive post and the negative cable is Engine Oil Filter Selection sonal injury. attached to the negative post. Battery posts This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow are marked (+) positive and negative (-) and type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection are identified on the battery case. Also, if a ment. The quality of replacement filters varies The quality of replacement engine air cleaner “fast charger” is used while the battery is in considerably. Only high quality filters should be filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient (Continued) 308 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! turer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery • Use only refrigerants and compressor lu- service facilities using recovery and recycling cables before connecting the charger to the bricants approved by the manufacturer for equipment. battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to pro- your air conditioning system. Some unap- NOTE: vide starting voltage. proved refrigerants are flammable and can Use only manufacturer approved A/C sys- explode, injuring you. Other unapproved tem PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. refrigerants or lubricants can cause the Air Conditioner Maintenance A/C Air Filter For best possible performance, your air condi- system to fail, requiring costly repairs. • tioner should be checked and serviced by an The air conditioning system contains re- WARNING! authorized dealer at the start of each warm frigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk season. This service should include cleaning of of personal injury or damage to the sys- Do not remove the A/C air filter while the the condenser fins and a performance test. tem, adding refrigerant or any repair re- blower is operating or personal injury may Drive belt tension should also be checked at quiring lines to be disconnected should be result. this time. done by an experienced repairman. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet CAUTION! behind the glove box. Perform the following NOTE: procedure to replace the filter: Do not use chemical flushes in your air Use only manufacturer approved A/C Sys- conditioning system as the chemicals can tem Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Con- 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents. damage your air conditioning components. ditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants. Such damage is not covered by the New Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling 2. Push in on the sides of the glove compart- Vehicle Limited Warranty. R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro- ment and lower the door. fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward. Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufac- 309 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure 6. Remove the two particulate air filters from Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera- the two air filter access doors to the HVAC the HVAC air inlet housing. Pull the filter ele- tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior housing. ments straight out of the housing, one at a time. to the application of any lubricant, the parts 7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter concerned should be wiped clean to remove position indicators pointing in the same direc- dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and tion as removal. grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo- nents to ensure proper function. When perform- CAUTION! ing other underhood services, the hood latch, The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to release mechanism and safety catch should be indicate airflow direction through the filter. cleaned and lubricated. Failure to properly install the filter will result The external lock cylinders should be lubricated in the need to replace it more often. twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, 5. Open the two air filter access doors. 8. Rotate the glove compartment door back such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant di- into position. rectly into the lock cylinder. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the Windshield Wiper Blades proper maintenance intervals. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft Body Lubrication cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will Locks and all body pivot points, including such remove accumulations of salt or road film. items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically periods may cause deterioration of the wiper with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. 310 Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber system in cold weather, select a solution or deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams out of contact with petroleum products such as mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes engine oil, gasoline, etc. range of your climate. This rating information to seep into the passenger compartment. In ad- NOTE: can be found on most washer fluid containers. dition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de- Replace as required. pending on geographical area and fre- WARNING! quency of use. Poor performance of blades Commercial windshield washer solvents are may be present with chattering, marks, wa- flammable. They could ignite and burn you. CAUTION! ter lines or wet spots. If any of these condi- Care must be exercised when filling or work- The catalytic converter requires the use of tions are present, clean the wiper blades or ing around the washer solution. unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will de- replace as necessary. stroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an Adding Washer Fluid emissions control device and may seriously Exhaust System reduce engine performance and cause seri- The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers The best protection against carbon monoxide ous damage to the engine. and the rear window washer (if equipped) is entry into the vehicle body is a properly main- shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the tained engine exhaust system. engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust converter will not require maintenance. How- windshield washer solvent only (not radiator system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected ever, it is important to keep the engine properly antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid res- inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and ervoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized prevent possible catalyst damage. cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; technician inspect the complete exhaust system this will help blade performance.

311 CAUTION! In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc- NOTE: tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may Intentional tampering with emissions con- Damage to the catalytic converter can result suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over- trol systems can result in civil penalties if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off being assessed against you. condition. In the event of engine malfunction, the engine and allow it to cool. Service, includ- particularly involving engine misfire or other ing a tune up to manufacturer’s specifications, Cooling System apparent loss of performance, have your should be obtained immediately. vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter WARNING! tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction damage: You or others can be badly burned by hot could cause the converter to overheat, re- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from sulting in possible damage to the converter ignition when the transmission is in gear and your radiator. If you see or hear steam com- and vehicle. the vehicle is in motion. ing from under the hood, do not open the • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or hood until the radiator has had time to cool. towing the vehicle. Never try to open a cooling system pressure WARNING! cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you wires disconnected or removed, such as park over materials that can burn. Such when diagnostic testing. Engine Coolant Checks materials might be grass or leaves coming • Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec- into contact with your exhaust system. Do Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods tion every 12 months (before the onset of during very rough idle or malfunctioning op- not park or operate your vehicle in areas freezing weather, where applicable). If the en- erating conditions. where your exhaust system can contact any- gine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in • thing that can burn. Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel. appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C con- denser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumu- 312 lation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill CAUTION! gently spraying water from a garden hose ver- If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or tically down the face of the A/C condenser (if contains visible sediment, have an authorized • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other equipped) or the back of the radiator core. dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti- than specified Organic Additive Technol- ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), Check the engine cooling system hoses for freeze) (conforming to MS-12106). brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tight- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the may result in engine damage and may ness of the connection at the coolant recovery proper maintenance intervals. decrease corrosion protection. Organic bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant NOTE: leaks. is different and should not be mixed with Some vehicles require special tools to add Hybrid Organic Additive Technology With the engine at normal operating tempera- coolant properly. Failure to fill these sys- ture (but not running), check the cooling system tems properly could lead to severe internal (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by engine damage. If any coolant is needed to “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). draining a small amount of engine coolant (an- be added to the system please contact your If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is tifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap local authorized dealer. introduced into the cooling system in an is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- emergency, the cooling system will need to freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- an authorized dealer as soon as possible. COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. tion. (Continued)

313 Please review these recommendations for us- Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility CAUTION! (Continued) ing Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine to maintain the proper level of protection • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require- against freezing according to the temperatures engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. occurring in the area where the vehicle is oper- not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): ated. products, as they may not be compatible • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/ NOTE: with the radiator engine coolant and may Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT • plug the radiator. (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the Some vehicles require special tools to • This vehicle has not been designed for use requirements of Chrysler Material Standard add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe with propylene glycol-based engine cool- MS-12106. internal engine damage. If any coolant is ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol- • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine needed to be added to the system please based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not coolant that meets the requirements of contact your local authorized dealer. recommended. Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and • distilled water. Use higher concentrations Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in Adding Coolant (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT Your vehicle has been built with an improved coolant are mixed in an emergency, have engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill 12106) that allows extended maintenance inter- deionized water when mixing the water/ with OAT coolant (conforming to MS- vals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use 12106) as soon as possible. up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of lower quality water will reduce the amount before replacement. To prevent reducing this ex- of corrosion protection in the engine cooling Cooling System Pressure Cap tended maintenance period, it is important that system. The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the your vehicle. radiator from the coolant recovery tank.

314 The cap should be inspected and cleaned if Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is there is any accumulation of foreign material on Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti- needed to maintain the proper level, it should be the sealing surfaces. freeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. disposal. Check with your local authorities to Points To Remember WARNING! determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do NOTE: • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in When the vehicle is stopped after a few on the cooling system pressure cap are a open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on miles/kilometers of operation, you may ob- safety precaution. Never add engine cool- the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek serve vapor coming from the front of the ant (antifreeze) when the engine is over- emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any engine compartment. This is normally a re- heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap ground spills immediately. sult of moisture from rain, snow, or high to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes Engine Coolant Level humidity accumulating on the radiator and pressure to build up in the cooling system. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual being vaporized when the thermostat opens, To prevent scalding or injury, do not re- method for determining that the coolant level is allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. move the pressure cap while the system is adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the If an examination of your engine compartment hot or under pressure. engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, • Do not use a pressure cap other than the be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will one specified for your vehicle. Personal soon dissipate. injury or engine damage may result. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti- and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the As long as the engine operating temperature is contents of the coolant expansion bottle must satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be also be protected against freezing. checked once a month.

315 • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi- Brake System Brake Master Cylinder tions are required, the cooling system should In order to assure brake system performance, The fluid level in the master cylinders should be be pressure tested for leaks. all brake system components should be in- checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. If • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen- spected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full level tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake (conforming to MS-12106) and distilled water master cylinder. With disc brakes, fluid level can for proper corrosion protection of your engine WARNING! be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. If the which contains aluminum components. brake fluid level is abnormally low, check sys- Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure tem for leaks. • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle and possibly an accident. Driving with your Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your result in abnormally high brake tempera- tures, excessive lining wear, and possible vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, WARNING! keep the front of the condenser clean. brake damage. You would not have your full • Use only manufacturer’s recommended • braking capacity in an emergency. Do not change the thermostat for Summer or brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces- and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Power Disc Brakes Other designs may result in unsatisfactory Disc brakes do not require adjustment; how- Vehicle” for further information. Using the engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor ever, several hard stops during the break-in wrong type of brake fluid can severely gas mileage, and increased emissions. period are recommended to seat the linings and damage your brake system and/or impair wear off any foreign material. its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic mas- ter cylinder reservoir.

(Continued) 316 WARNING! (Continued) Automatic Transmission — If CAUTION! (Continued) Equipped • To avoid contamination from foreign matter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid Selection Of Lubricant Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid speci- that has been in a tightly closed container. It is important to use the proper transmission fications. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap se- fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor- mance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s cured at all times. Brake fluid in a open specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Special Additives container absorbs moisture from the air re- Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section The manufacturer strongly recommends against sulting in a lower boiling point. This may for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain using any special additives in the transmission. cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or the transmission fluid at the correct level using Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engi- prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake the recommended fluid. neered product and its performance may be failure. This could result in a accident. NOTE: impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, • do not add any fluid additives to the transmis- Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can No chemical flushes should be used in any sion. The only exception to this policy is the use result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine transmission; only the approved lubricant parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid should be used. using transmission sealers as they may ad- Brake fluid can also damage painted and versely affect seals. vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to CAUTION! avoid its contact with these surfaces. CAUTION! • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to Using a transmission fluid other than the contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal manufacturer’s recommended fluid may Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis- components could be damaged, causing cause deterioration in transmission shift sion as the chemicals can damage your trans- partial or complete brake failure. This quality and/or torque converter shudder, and mission components. Such damage is not could result in an accident. will require more frequent fluid and filter covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) 317 Fluid Level Check — 3.6L Engine 6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and rein- NOTE: It is best to check the fluid level when the sert it until seated. If it is necessary to check the transmission transmission is at normal operating temperature 7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid below the operating temperature, the fluid (approximately 180° F / 82° C). This occurs level on both sides. The fluid level reading is level should be between the two COLD (lower) after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approxi- normal operating temperature, the fluid cannot sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes in the mately 80° F (27° C). If the fluid level is cor- be held comfortably between the fingertips. dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at rectly established at 80° F (27° C), it should be Use the following procedure to check the trans- or above the hole. The fluid level should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes mission fluid level properly: between the HOT (upper) reference holes on when the transmission reaches 180° F (82° C). Remember it is best to check the level at the 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the normal operating temperature. 2. Remove the engine cover by pulling it up off dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Do the mounting studs. not overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid (see CAUTION! " " 3. Run the engine at idle speed and normal Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for fluid If the fluid temperature is below 50° F operating temperature. specifications). After adding any quantity of oil (10° C), it may not register on the dipstick. through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two Do not add fluid until the temperature is 4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the minutes for the oil to fully drain into the trans- brake pedal. mission before rechecking the fluid level. elevated enough to produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to 5. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission warm the fluid. to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in PARK. 8. Reinstall the engine cover and snap it down securely onto the mounting studs.

318 9. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake. CAUTION! the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole. NOTE: If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your To prevent dirt and water from entering the authorized dealer immediately. Severe trans- Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. transmission after checking or replenishing mission damage may occur. Your authorized fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid Frequency Of Fluid Change properly reseated. It is normal for the dip- level accurately. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid stick cap to spring back slightly from its installed at the factory will give satisfactory fully seated position, as long as its seal lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid remains engaged in the dipstick tube. Fluid And Filter Changes changes are not necessary unless the lubricant Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the Fluid Level Check — 2.8L Diesel Engine has become contaminated with water. If con- proper maintenance intervals. In addition, The fluid level is preset at the factory and does taminated with water, the fluid should be change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes not require adjustment under normal operating changed immediately. contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans- conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not mission is disassembled for any reason. required, therefore the transmission filler tube is Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) — If Equipped capped and no dipstick is provided. Your autho- Manual Transmission — If Equipped rized dealer can check your transmission fluid The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segre- level using a special service dipstick. If you Selection Of Lubricant gated volume of fluid within the brake system notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc- Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual master cylinder reservoir. In the event of leak- tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, age or wear, use only the manufacturer’s rec- have the transmission fluid level checked. Op- and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Ve- ommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri- erating the vehicle with an improper fluid level hicle” for further information. cants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your can cause severe transmission damage. Fluid Level Check Vehicle” for further information. Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of

319 Transfer Case CAUTION! Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Fluid Level Check When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of them. You could damage them and cause Protection Of Body And Paint From the fill hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level them to leak. Corrosion position. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals Selection Of Lubricant that make roads passable in snow and ice and Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. those that are sprayed on trees and road sur- Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” faces during other seasons are highly corrosive in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, tion. which exposes your vehicle to airborne con- Front/Rear Axle Fluid taminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and Fluid Level Check other extreme conditions will have an adverse Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody pro- fill hole. tection. Adding Fluid Adding Fluid The following maintenance recommendations Fluid should be added only at filler hole until Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from fluid begins to run out of the hole. level specified above. the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. Drain Selection Of Lubricant First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. (C). The recommended tightening torque for the Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m). in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tion.

320 What Causes Corrosion? • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re- MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, the paint, touch them up immediately. The moval of paint and protective coatings from your stains and to protect your paint finish. Take cost of such repairs is considered the re- vehicle. care never to scratch the paint. sponsibility of the owner. The most common causes are: • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out or similar cause that destroys the paint and the paint finish. protective coating, have your vehicle re- • Stone and gravel impact. paired as soon as possible. The cost of such • Insects, tree sap and tar. CAUTION! repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning • materials such as steel wool or scouring If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. powder that will scratch metal and painted fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. Washing surfaces. • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal consider mud or stone shields behind each Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse of paint and decals. wheel. the panels completely with clear water. • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have Special Care as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® has touch up paint to match the color of your • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to vehicle. drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- remove. riage at least once a month. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. 321 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi- oven cleaner. These products may damage and, if used in closed areas, they may cause num and chrome plated wheels, should be the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic respiratory harm. cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh to prevent corrosion. brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro- • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner CAUTION! dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. or equivalent is recommended. When installing hanging air fresheners in NOTE: your vehicle, read the installation instructions If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Interior Care carefully. Some air fresheners will damage Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel clean- Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to the finish of painted or decorated parts if ers, abrasives or polishing compounds. clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. allowed to directly contact any surface. They will permanently damage this finish Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a and such damage is not covered by the New damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Glass Surfaces Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD Clean or equivalent , then MOPAR® Spot & All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely nec- regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or Used on a regular basis this is all that is essary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor any commercial household-type glass cleaner. required to maintain this finish. All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use cau- clean vinyl upholstery. tion when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right CAUTION! WARNING! rear quarter window equipped with the radio Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use instrument that may scratch the elements. purposes. Many are potentially flammable (Continued) (Continued) 322 When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models Washing – Use MOPAR® Car Wash or equiva- cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. lent, or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. CAUTION! brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use MOPAR® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s The lenses in front of the instruments in this Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner interior trim and top, follow these precau- on the entire top, but support the top from vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When clean- tions: ing the lenses, care must be taken to avoid underneath. scratching the plastic. Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of • Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may water. Remember to allow the top to dry before solution may be used, but do not use high damage interior trim. alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is lowering it. used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. • Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material, as damage may CAUTION! 2. Dry with a soft cloth. result. Failure to follow these cautions may cause Seat Belt Maintenance • Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down interior water damage, stains or mildew on Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with and dry on the paint, leaving a streak. the top material: chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will • weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also • After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, al- Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they weaken the fabric. ways make sure it is completely dry before can damage the top material. Also, in- lowering. creased water pressure may force past the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total weather strips. Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. • Be especially careful when washing the win- Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to dows by following the directions for “Care of (Continued) wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Fabric Top Windows.” Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. 323 Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION! (Continued) 4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use • It is recommended that the top be free of CAUTION! warm water only if you must clean the window water prior to opening it. Operating the top, quickly. opening a door or lowering a window while Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic 5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off- the top is wet may allow water to drip into windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these di- road driving will have a major impact on zipper the vehicle’s interior. operation. Even normal on-road driving and ve- rections: • Use care when washing the vehicle, water hicle washing will eventually impact window zipper pressure directed at the weather strip operation. To maintain ease of use of the window seals may cause water to leak into the 1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. In- zippers, each window zipper should be cleaned vehicle’s interior. stead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton and lubricated regularly. Use MOPAR® Soft Top cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean • Careless handling and storage of the re- Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to water, and wipe across the window, not up movable roof panels may damage the ease zipper operation. Before applying, make sure and down. MOPAR® Jeep Soft Glass Window the zipper teeth are clear of sand, mud, and other seals, causing water to leak into the vehi- Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic materials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not just cle’s interior. windows without scratching. It removes fine one side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh • The front panel(s) must be positioned scratches to improve visibility and provides UV water and allow to dry. Aggressively work the properly to ensure sealing. Improper in- protection to help prevent yellowing. MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant stallation can cause water to leak into the 2. When washing, never use hot water or or equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper vehicle’s interior. anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use slide is experienced, work the MOPAR® Soft Top solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into agents. the zipper slide. Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free. 3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean 6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any cloth. tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage the windows. 324 FUSES WARNING! (Continued) Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that in the engine compartment near the battery. WARNING! the ignition is off and that all the other This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses • When replacing a blown fuse, always use services are switched off and/or disen- and relays. A label that identifies each compo- an appropriate replacement fuse with the gaged. nent is printed on the inside of the cover. same amp rating as the original fuse. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact Never replace a fuse with another fuse of an authorized dealer. higher amp rating. Never replace a blown • If a general protection fuse for safety sys- fuse with metal wires or any other material. tems (air bag system, braking system), Failure to use proper fuses may result in power unit systems (engine system, gear- serious personal injury, fire and/or property box system) or steering system blows, damage. contact an authorized dealer.

(Continued)

Totally Integrated Power Module

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J1 — — J2 30 Amp Pink Transfer Case Module J3 — —

325 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J4 25 Amp Natural Driver Door Node J5 25 Amp Natural Passenger Door Node J6 40 Amp Green Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/Stability Control System J7 30 Amp Pink Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/Stability Control System J8 — — J9 40 Amp Green PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel J10 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve J11 30 Amp Pink Sway Bar J12 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower Motor/Radiator Fan J13 60 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main J14 40 Amp Green Rear Defroster J15 40 Amp Green Front Blower J17 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid J18 20 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range J19 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan

326 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J20 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper LO/HI J21 20 Amp Blue Front/Rear Washer J22 — Spare M1 15 Amp Blue Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch Stop Lamp Feed M2 20 Amp Yellow Relay Trailer Lighting (Stoplamp) M3 20 Amp Yellow Frt/Rear Axle Locker Relay M4 — — M5 25 Amp Natural Power Inverter – If Equipped M6 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor M7 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) M8 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat M9 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped M10 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System, Satel- lite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD, Hands-Free Module, RADIO, Antenna, Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp

327 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M11 10 Amp Red (Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System, Underhood Lamp M12 30 Amp Green Amplifier M13 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment Node, Wireless Control Module, SIREN, Multifunction Control Switch M14 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow (Export Only) M15 20 Amp Yellow Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror, Cabin Com- partment Node, Transfer Case Switch, Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – Export Diesel Only M16 10 Amp Red Module M17 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp M18 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp M19 25 Amp Natural Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2) M20 15 Amp Blue Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch Bank M21 20 Amp Yellow Auto Shut Down (ASD #3) M22 10 Amp Red Right Horn (HI/LOW) M23 10 Amp Red Left Horn (HI/LOW)

328 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M24 25 Amp Natural Rear Wiper M25 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only M26 10 Amp Red Power Window Switch, Driver Window Switch M27 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module M28 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module M29 10 Amp Red Powertrain M30 15 Amp Blue Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed M31 20 Amp Yellow Backup Lamps M32 10 Amp Red Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE M33 10 Amp Red Powertrain Controller M34 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp Wash, Compass M35 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors M36 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet M37 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability Control, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Relay M38 25 Amp Natural Lock/Unlock Motors

329 CAUTION! VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS • When installing the Integrated Power Mod- If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more Interior Lights Bulb Type than 21 days, you may want to take steps to ule cover, it is important to ensure the Auto. Trans. Indicator Lamp ...... 658 protect your battery. You may: cover is properly positioned and fully Courtesy Lights, Under Dash (1) ...... 906 • Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power latched. Failure to do so may allow water Heater Control Lamps (2) ...... 194 to get into the Integrated Power Module, Distribution Center (PDC) labeled Ignition- Off Draw (IOD) and store it in a safe location Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window and possibly result in an electrical system within the PDC. Defogger) ...... ** failure. • • When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor- Or, disconnect the negative cable from the Soundbar Dome Lamp...... 912 tant to use only a fuse having the correct battery. ** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer. Exterior Lights Bulb Type amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out rating other than indicated may result in a of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or Backup Lamps (2) ...... W16W dangerous electrical system overload. If a more, run the air conditioning system at idle Center High-Mounted properly rated fuse continues to blow, it for about five minutes in the fresh air and Stop Lamp (1) ...... LED (Serviced at high blower setting. This will ensure ad- Authorized Dealer) indicates a problem in the circuit that must equate system lubrication to minimize the be corrected. Front Fog Lamps (2) ...... PSX24W possibility of compressor damage when the Rear Fog Lamps (2)...... P27/7W system is started again. Front Direction Lamps (2)...... P27/7W Front Side Repeaters/Side Marker Lamps (2) ...... W5W Headlamps (2)...... H4 Front Position Lamps (2) ...... 12V14W Stop/Rear Position Lamps (2) .....P27/7W

330 Rear Direction Lamps (2) ...... PY27/7W 4. Turn both park and turn signal socket as- 12. Install the rubber seal and connector to the License Lamp (2)...... W5W semblies 1/4 turn counterclockwise and re- headlamp bulb. move. NOTE: 13. Reinstall lamp to body with retaining ring Numbers refer to commercial bulb types 5. Remove the four screws holding the metal and four screws. retaining ring. that can be purchased from your local au- 14. Reinstall park and turn signal connectors, thorized dealer. 6. Remove the lamp from the collar. and reinstall front grille. 7. Remove the connector from the lamp, and Front Park/Turn Signal BULB REPLACEMENT remove the rubber seal. NOTE: 1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers 8. Unlatch the metal spring bulb retainer by along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- pushing forward and outward on retaining legs. remove. spheric conditions. This will usually clear as 9. Pull the bulb from the housing. atmospheric conditions change to allow the 2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at condensation to change back into a vapor. 10. Install the bulb into the headlamp housing. one side and working toward the other. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate 3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counter- the clearing process. CAUTION! clockwise and remove from housing. Pull the Headlamp Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. bulb straight from the socket to replace. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb 1. Open hood and support using prop rod. Front Side Marker life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily 2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and the front side marker socket. remove. 11. Latch the metal spring retainer to headlamp 2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at bulb. 1/3 turn and remove it from the housing. Pull the one side and working toward the other. bulb straight from the socket to replace.

331 Front Fog Lamp Rear Fog Lamp 2. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp 1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back 1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back away from the body. of the front fog lamp. of the rear fog lamp. 3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn coun- 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from 2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise terclockwise, then remove it from the housing. the front fog lamp connector receptacle. 1/4 turn and remove it from the housing. Pull the 4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to 3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch fea- bulb straight from the socket to replace. replace. tures and squeeze them together to unlock the Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing. Backup Lamp Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed (CHMSL) 1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching opening in the housing and then connect the The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that the tail light housing to the body. DO NOT replacement bulb. extends upward from the tailgate behind the REMOVE THE OUTER SCREWS AT ANY spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the TIME. CAUTION! LED/Cover Assembly from your local autho- rized dealer. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb 1. Remove the spare tire. life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily 2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/ surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. cover in place on the spare tire carrier. 3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover.

332 FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) — Two Door Models 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters Fuel (Approximate) — Four Door Models 22.5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters 2.8 Liter Diesel Engine - With Particulate Filter (SAE 5W-30 Synthetic, low ash) 7 Quarts 6.5 Liters 2.8 Liter Diesel Engine - Without Particulate Filter (SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic) 7 Quarts 6.5 Liters Cooling System * 3.6 Liter Engine-MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT 10.5 Quarts 9.9 Liters (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. 2.8 Liter Diesel Engine-MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile For- 13 Quarts 12 Liters mula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. * Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

333 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106, or an equivalent coolant. Engine Oil – Gasoline (Non ACEA Categories) We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Mate- rial Standard MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535-CR1. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Chrysler MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available. Engine Oil – Gasoline (ACEA Categories) For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend you use 5W-20 engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to Chrysler MS–6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1. SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Chrysler MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available. Engine Oil – Diesel (with Particulate Filter) We recommend you use SAE 5W-30 diesel engine oils conforming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. For countries that use ACEA European oil categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 (LOW ASH) and approved to Chrysler MS-11106 or Fiat 9.55535–S3.

334 Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Oil – Diesel (without Particulate We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 diesel engine oils conforming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. For Filter) countries that use ACEA European oil categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 (LOW ASH) and approved to Chrysler MS-11106 or Fiat 9.55535–S3. Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]) Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters. Fuel Selection – Gasoline Engines Research Octane Number (RON) of 91 Fuel Selection – Diesel Engines 50 Cetane or higher (Less than 50 ppm Sulfur)

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid. Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-9224. Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.

335 Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5). Axle Differential (Rear) 226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140). Models equipped with Trac-Lok™ require an additive. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.

336 8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ...... 338 • Maintenance Schedule — Gasoline Engine ...... 338 • Maintenance Schedule — Diesel Engine ...... 353

337 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator message will illuminate Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator approximately 7,000 miles (11,200 km) after the message after completing the scheduled oil Maintenance Schedule — Gasoline most recent oil change was performed. Have change. If this scheduled oil change is performed Engine your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, by someone other than your dealer, the message The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in within 500 miles (800 km). However, an earlier can be reset by referring to the steps described this manual must be done at the times or oil change at 4,500 miles (7,500 km) may be under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/ mileages specified to protect your vehicle war- required if the vehicle is operated under “Se- Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument ranty and ensure the best vehicle performance vere Duty Conditions” later in this section. Panel” for further information. and reliability. More frequent maintenance may NOTE: At Each Stop for Fuel be needed for vehicles in severe operating • • Check the engine oil level about five minutes conditions, such as dusty areas and very short The oil change indicator message will not after a fully warmed engine is shut off. trip driving. Inspection and service should also monitor the time since the last oil change. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. Change your vehicle’s oil if it has been 12 months since your last oil change even if level ground will improve the accuracy of the The oil change indicator system will remind you the oil change indicator message is NOT oil level reading. Add oil only when the level that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched- illuminated. is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. uled maintenance. • Change your engine oil more often if you • Check the windshield washer solvent and On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “CHANgE drive your vehicle off-road for an ex- add if required. OIL” will flash in the instrument cluster odom- tended period of time. eter and a single chime will sound, indicating • that an oil change is necessary. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months, whichever comes first.

338 Once a Month At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals • Check tire pressure and look for unusual • Change the engine oil filter. Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign following pages for the required maintenance • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the intervals. oil indicator system turns on. CAUTION! • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required. Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmission and add as needed. • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

339 7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 12 Months 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil fil- ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil fil- ter.†† ter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the fol- lowing: Dusty or off-road conditions. In- spect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if neces- sary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

340 22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

341 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 60 Months ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil fil- ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ter.†† ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off- road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds dur- ing hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

342 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 84 Months ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil fil- ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ter.†† ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the ❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

343 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

344 67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the spark plugs. * * The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

345 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 132 Months ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. filter.†† ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. grease, reapply if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

346 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.† ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds dur- ing hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

347 97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or 156 Months 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 168 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. filter.†† ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

348 112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or 180 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

349 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 192 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s). ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds dur- ing hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid, and filter.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

350 127,500 Miles (204,000 km) or 135,000 Miles (216,000 km) or 216 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 204 Months Maintenance Service ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† Schedule ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. filter.†† ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the ❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the spark plugs. * * The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

351 142,500 Miles (228,000 km) or 150,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 240 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 228 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. filter.†† ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

352 † This maintenance is recommended by the • Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial • Check the fluid levels of engine coolant/ manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to service). antifreeze deaeration bottle, and brake mas- maintain emissions warranty. ter cylinder, add as needed. • Off-road or desert operation. • Check all lights and all other electrical items WARNING! Maintenance Schedule — Diesel for correct operation. You can be badly injured working on or Engine At Each Oil Change around a motor vehicle. Do only service work At Each Stop for Fuel • Change the engine oil filter. for which you have the knowledge and the • Check the engine oil level about five minutes right equipment. If you have any doubt about after a fully warmed engine is shut off. • Inspect the exhaust system. your ability to perform a service job, take Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on • Inspect brake hoses. your vehicle to a competent mechanic. level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level • Check the engine coolant/antifreeze level, is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. hoses, and clamps. Severe Duty Conditions • †† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at • Check the windshield washer solvent, add as Inspect engine accessory drive belts. Re- every 4500 miles (7,500 km) or 12 months if required. place as necessary. using your vehicle under any of the following Once a Month • Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel severe duty conditions: filter/water separator unit. • Check tire pressure and look for unusual • Stop and go driving. wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign Inspection and service should be performed • Driving in dusty conditions. of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the anytime a malfunction is observed or sus- oil indicator system turns on. pected. Retain all receipts. • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km). • Inspect the battery; clean and tighten the • Trailer towing. terminals as required.

353 Diesel Models with Diesel Particulate Filter Required Maintenance Intervals (DPF) Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the The oil change indicator system will remind you following pages for the required maintenance that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched- intervals. uled maintenance. NOTE: A “CHANgE OIL” message will flash in the Under no circumstances should oil change instrument cluster odometer and a single chime intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or will sound, indicating that an oil change is 12 months, whichever comes first. necessary. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate, this means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/ Trip Odometer” in "Understanding Your Instru- ment Panel” for further information.

354 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

355 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Replace the fuel filter. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

356 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

357 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Replace the fuel filter. ❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary. ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using the vehicle for any of the following; police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

358 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

359 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Replace the fuel filter. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

360 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

361 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Replace the fuel filter. ❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Change the transfer case if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary. ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. ❏ Replace the engine timing belt, and timing belt tensioner.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

362 135,000 Miles (216,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

363 150,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule WARNING! ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† You can be badly injured working on or ❏ Rotate tires. around a motor vehicle. Do only that service ❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. work for which you have the knowledge and ❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. the right equipment. If you have any doubt ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. about your ability to perform a service job, ❏ Replace the fuel filter. take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant (antifreeze).

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

364 9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 368 • ARGENTINA ...... 369 • AUSTRALIA ...... 369 • AUSTRIA ...... 369 • BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN ...... 370 • BELGIUM ...... 370 • BOLIVIA ...... 370 • BRAZIL ...... 371 • BULGARIA ...... 371 • CHILE ...... 371 • CHINA...... 372 • COLOMBIA...... 372 • COSTA RICA ...... 372 • CROATIA ...... 373 • CZECH REPUBLIC ...... 373 • DENMARK ...... 373 • DOMINICAN REPUBLIC ...... 374 • ECUADOR ...... 374 • EL SALVADOR...... 374

365 • ESTONIA ...... 375 • FINLAND ...... 375 • FRANCE ...... 375 • GERMANY ...... 376 • GREECE ...... 376 • GUATEMALA ...... 376 • HONDURAS ...... 377 • HUNGARY ...... 377 • IRELAND ...... 377 • ITALY...... 378 • LATVIA ...... 378 • LITHUANIA ...... 378 • LUXEMBURG...... 379 • NETHERLANDS ...... 379 • NEW ZEALAND ...... 379 • NORWAY...... 380 • PANAMA ...... 380 • PARAGUAY...... 380 • PERU ...... 381 • POLAND ...... 381 • PORTUGAL...... 381 • PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN ISLANDS ...... 382 • REUNION ...... 382 • ROMANIA...... 382 • RUSSIA ...... 383 • SLOVAKIA ...... 383 • SLOVENIA ...... 383 366 • SPAIN...... 384 • SWEDEN ...... 384 • SWITZERLAND ...... 384 • TAIWAN...... 385 • TURKEY ...... 385 • UKRAINE ...... 385 • UNITED KINGDOM ...... 386 • URUGUAY ...... 386 • VENEZUELA ...... 386

367 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE When you contact the distributor please provide all of the following information: The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter- • ested in your satisfaction with their products Your name, address and phone number. and services. If a servicing problem or other • Vehicle Identification Number (this 17 digit difficulty should occur, we recommend that you number is found on an etched plate or label, take the following steps: located on the left front corner of the instru- Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer ment panel, visible through the windshield. It with the dealer principal or the service manager. is also available from your vehicle registra- Management personnel at the authorized tion or title). dealer are in the best position to resolve the • Selling and servicing authorized dealer. problem. • Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometer distance. • Service history of your vehicle. • An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs.

368 ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA Chrysler Argentina S.A Chrysler Australia Pty. Ltd. Jeep Customer Service* Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435 ACN 124 956 505 Universal Toll Free Number C1107CII PO Box 23267, Docklands Victoria 3008 Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Buenos Aires, Argentina Ph. (03) 8698-0200 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 20 1741 Tel.: +54-11-4891 7900 International Toll Number Fax: +54-11-4891 7901 Tel: + 39 02 444 12 045 Chrysler Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 201745 International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 201747 International Toll Number Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 369 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN BELGIUM BOLIVIA Interamericana Trading Corporation Jeep Customer Service* Ovando & Cia S.A. Warrens, St. Michael Universal Toll Free Number Av. Cristobal de Mendoza (2do Anillo) y Canal Barbados, West Indies Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Isuto BB22026, P0 Box 98 Local Toll Free Number Santa Cruz, Bolivia Tel: 0800 55 888 PO Box 6852 Tel.: 246–417–8000 International Toll Number Fax: 246–425–2888 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Tel.: (591-3) 336 3100 Chrysler Customer Service* Fax: (591-3) 334 0229 Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 18 142 International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 16 166 International Toll Number Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 370 BRAZIL BULGARIA CHILE Chrysler do Brasil BALKAN STAR Comercial Chrysler S.A. Rua Funchal, 418 - 16º andar CJ 1601/1602, Resbarska Str. 5 Av. Americo Vespucio 1601, Quilicura Vila Olímpia 1510 Sofia Santiago, Chile 04551-060 Sao Paulo – S.P., Brazil Tel.: 359 2 91988 Zip Code 101931-7, 367-V Tel: +5511 4949 3900 Fax: 359 2 945 40 14 Tel.: +562 837 1300 Fax: +5511 4949 3905 Fax: +562 6039196

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 371 CHINA COLOMBIA COSTA RICA Chrysler Group (China) Sales Limited Chrysler Colombia S.A. AutoStar 16F,Gemdale Plaza Tower A Avenida Calle 26 # 70A-25 La Uruca, frente al Banco Nacional No.91 Jian Guo Road Zip Code 110931 San José, Costa Rica Chaoyang District Bogotá Colombia PO Box 705-1150 Beijing 100022, P.R. China Tel: +57 1 745 5777 Tel.: (506) 295 - 0000 Chrysler Brand Tel: 400-650-1195 Fax: +57 1 410 5667 Fax: (506) 295 - 0052 Dodge Brand Tel: 400-650-0118

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 372 CROATIA CZECH REPUBLIC DENMARK Autocommerce Hrvatska d.o.o. Fiat CR s.r.o. Jeep Customer Service* Jablanska 80 Karolinska 650/1 Universal Toll Free Number 10 000 Zagreb 186 00 Praha 8 – Karlin Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Tel: 00 385 1 3869 001 Czech Republic Local Toll Free Number Tel: 80 20 5337 Fax: 00 385 1 3869 069 Tel: +420 2 24806 111 International Toll Number Fax: +420 2 24806 312 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Chrysler Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 80 20 30 35 International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 80 20 30 36 International Toll Number Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 373 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC ECUADOR EL SALVADOR Reid y Compañia Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Grupo Q del Salvador John F. Kennedy Casi Esq. Lope de Vega Av. Juan Tanca Marengo km. 4.5 Ave. Las Amapolas (Autopista Sur) Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic Guayaquil, Ecuador Blvd. Los Próceres y Avenida No. 1, Lomas de Tel.: (809) 562–7211 Tel.: +593 4 2244101 San Francisco, Fax: (809) 565-8774 Fax: +593 4 2244273 San Salvador, El Salvador Zip Code 152 Tel.: +503 2248 6400 Fax: +503 278 5731

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 374 ESTONIA FINLAND FRANCE Silberauto AS AutoFennica Jeep Customer Service* Järvevana tee 11 Ristipellontie 5 Universal Toll Free Number 11314 Tallinn 00390 HELSINKI Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Tel.: +372 53337946 Tel: 020 54771 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 0 42653 Tel.: 06 266 072 Fax: 020 5477 485 International Toll Number Fax: 06 266 066 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 [email protected] Chrysler Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 169216 International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 363430 International Toll Number Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 375 GERMANY GREECE GUATEMALA Jeep Customer Service* Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas Grupo Q del Guatemala Universal Toll Free Number 240-242 Kifisias Avenue Km 16 carretera a El Salvador, condado con- Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 15231 Halandri Athens, Greece cepción Local Toll Free Number Tel.: +30 210 6700800 Ciudad de Guatemala, Guatemala Tel: 0800 0426533 Zip Code 1004 International Toll Number Fax: +30 210 6700820 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Tel.: +502 6685 9500 Chrysler Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 1692 169 International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 3634 300 International Toll Number Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 376 HONDURAS HUNGARY IRELAND Grupo Q de Honduras Fiat Hungary Co. Ltd. Jeep Customer Service* Blvd.. Centro América frente a Plaza Miraflores, H-1123 Budapest Universal Toll Free Number Tegucigalpa, Honduras Alkotás u. 53. Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Tel.: +504 2290 3700 Tel.:+36-1-458-3100 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 1800 505337 Fax: +504 2232 6564 Fax: +36-1-458-3148 International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Chrysler Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 1800 363463 International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 1800 363430 International Toll Number Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 377 ITALY LATVIA LITHUANIA Jeep Customer Service* TC MOTORS LTD. Silberauto AS Universal Toll Free Number 41 Krasta Str. Pirklių g. 9 Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 LV-1003 Riga LT-02300 Vilnius Local Toll Free Number Tel.: +37167812 313 Tel +370 52 665956, GSM +370 698 24950 Tel: 800 0 42653 International Toll Number Mob.: +371 29498662 Fax +370 52 665951 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Fax: +371 67812313 [email protected] Chrysler Customer Service* SIA “Autobrava” Universal Toll Free Number G.Astras street 5, Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 LV-1084 Riga Local Toll Free Number Tel: 800 1692 16 Tel.: +371 67812312 International Toll Number Mob.: +371 29498662 Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Fax +371 671 462 56 Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 800 363430 International Toll Number Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 378 LUXEMBURG NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND Jeep Customer Service* Jeep Customer Service* Chrysler New Zealand Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Private Bag 14907 Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Panmure New Zealand Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Tel: 09573 7800 Tel: 8002 5888 Tel: 0031 203421760 International Toll Number International Toll Number Fax: 09573 7808 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Chrysler Customer Service* Chrysler Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Tel: 8002 8216 Tel: 0031 203421758 International Toll Number International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Tel: 8002 8217 Tel: 0031 203421754 International Toll Number International Toll Number Tel: Not Available Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 379 NORWAY PANAMA PARAGUAY RSA BIL Automotora Autostar S. A. Garden Autolider S.A Øvre Eikervei 77 Avenida Domingo Diaz, Via Tocumen, Frente a Av. República de Argentina esq. Facundo N-3048 Drammen la Urbanizacion El Crisol Machain Tel.: +47 32 21 88 00 Panamá, Panamá Asuncion, Paraguay Fax: +47 32 82 60 99 Tel.: +507 233 7222 Tel.: +595 21 664 580 Fax: +507 233 2843 Fax: +595 21 664 579

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 380 PERU POLAND PORTUGAL Divemotor S.A. Fiat Auto Poland S.A. Chrysler Portugal S.A. Av. Canada 1160, Urb. Sta. Catalina ul. M. Grażyńskiego 141, Qta. da Fonte – Edif. Dª Amélia Lima, Peru 43-300 Bielsko-Biała Rua Victor Câmara, 2 1ªA Zip Code Lima 13 Tel: +48 (033) 813-21-00, 813-51-00 2770-229 Paço de Arcos Tel.: (51-1) 712 2000 Portugal Fax: (51-1) 712 2002 Tel : +351 (0)21 323 91 00 Fax: +351 (0)21 323 91 99

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 381 PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN REUNION ROMANIA ISLANDS COTRANS AUTOMOBILES AUTO ITALIA IMPEX SRL Chrysler International Services, S.A. 17 Bd du Chaudron, 97490 Sainte Clotilde Bd. Timisoara nr. 60/D Calle 1 lote 1 Suite 205, Metro Office Park Tel: 0262920000 Bucuresti, ROMANIA Guaynabo, Puerto Rico Fax: 0262488443 Tel: +40 (0)21.444.333.4 P.O. Box 191857 Fax: +40 (0)21.444.2779 San Juan 009191857 www.autoitalia.ro Tel.: 7877825757 Fax: 7877823345

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 382 RUSSIA SLOVAKIA SLOVENIA Chrysler Russia SAO Fiat SR s.r.o Avto Triglav d.o.o. Testovskaya street, 10 Dubravska cesta 2 Dunajska 122 123317 Moscow, 841 05 Bratislava 45 1000 Ljubljana Tel +7(495)-745-26-36 Slovakia Tel: 01 5883 400 Fax +7(495)-745-26-37 Tel: +421 2 593099 901 Fax: 01 5883 487 Fax: +421 2 593099 911

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 383 SPAIN SWEDEN SWITZERLAND Jeep Customer Service* Jeep Customer Service* Jeep Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Tel: 900 10 5337 Tel: 020 5337 00 Tel: 0800 0426 53 International Toll Number International Toll Number International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Chrysler Customer Service* Chrysler Customer Service* Chrysler Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Tel: 900 1692 00 Tel: 020 303035 Tel: 0800 1692 16 International Toll Number International Toll Number International Toll Number Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Dodge Customer Service* Dodge Customer Service* Dodge Customer Service* Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Universal Toll Free Number Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Local Toll Free Number Tel: 900 363430 Tel: 020 303036 Tel: 0800 3634 30 International Toll Number International Toll Number International Toll Number Tel: Not Available Tel: Not Available Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 384 TAIWAN TURKEY UKRAINE Chrysler Taiwan Co. , LTD. Tofaş Türk Otomobil Fabrikasi A.S. PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL” 13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza Büyükdere Cad, No:145 Tofaş Han Zincirlikuyu Chervonoarmiyska Str. 15/2 1109 Min Sheng East Road, Section 3 ISTAMBUL 01004 Kyiv Taipei Taiwan R.O.C. Tel: (0212) 444 5337 Tel : +380 44 206 8888 Tel.: 080081581 Tel: (0212) 275 2960 +380 44 201 6060 Fax: 886225471871 Telefax: (0212) 275 0357 Fax: +380 44 206 8889

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 385 UNITED KINGDOM URUGUAY VENEZUELA Jeep Customer Service* SEVEL Uruguay S. A. Chrysler de Venezuela LLC Universal Toll Free Number Convenio 820 Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer. Zona Industrial Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337 Montevideo, Uruguay Norte Local Toll Free Number Zip Code 11700 Valencia, Estado Caraboro Tel: 0800 1692966 Tel: +(58) 241-613 2400 International Toll Number Tel: +598 220 02980 Tel: +39 02 444 12 045 Fax: +598 2209-0116 Fax: +(58) 241-613 2538 Chrysler Customer Service* Fax: (58) 241-6132602 Universal Toll Free Number (58) 241-6132438 Tel: 00 800 1692 1692 PO BOX: 1960 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 1692169 Services And Parts International Toll Number Zona Industrial II, Av. Norte-Sur 5 C/C Calle Tel: +39 02 444 12046 Este-Oeste Dodge Customer Service* C.C LD Center Local B-2 Universal Toll Free Number Valencia, Estado Carabobo Tel: 00 800 36343 000 Telf: (58) 241-6132757 Local Toll Free Number Tel: 0800 1692956 (58) 241-6132773 International Toll Number Fax: (58) 241-6132743 Tel: Not Available (*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number. 386 387 388 10

INDEX

389 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . .180, 244 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 67 Brake System...... 316 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .314 Automatic Door Locks ...... 23 Anti-Lock (ABS) ...... 244, 245 Adding Fuel ...... 272 Automatic Headlights ...... 97 Master Cylinder ...... 316 Additives, Fuel ...... 271 Automatic Oil Change Indicator ...... 192 Parking ...... 243 Airbag...... 35 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .203 Warning Light ...... 179 Airbag Deployment ...... 40 Automatic Transaxle Brake/Transmission Interlock ...... 223 Airbag Light ...... 41, 58, 180 Interlock System ...... 13 Bulb Replacement ...... 330, 331 Airbag Maintenance ...... 41 Automatic Transmission .....223, 317, 319 Bulbs, Light...... 59 Airbag, Side ...... 39 Adding Fluid ...... 319 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Fluid and Filter Changes ...... 319 Calibration, Compass ...... 189, 194 Filter)...... 308 Fluid Change ...... 319 Capacities, Fluid ...... 333 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 309 Fluid Level Check ...... 318, 319 Caps, Filler Air Conditioning Filter ...... 208, 309 Fluid Type ...... 317 Fuel ...... 272 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 209 Special Additives ...... 317 Power Steering ...... 242 Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...... 309 Autostick ...... 227 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...... 314 Air Conditioning System ...... 203 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . .106 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 57 Air Pressure, Tires ...... 256 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 106 Cargo Light ...... 100 Alarm Light ...... 181 Axle Lock ...... 233 Car Washes...... 321 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 15 Cellular Phone ...... 68, 203 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...... 8 Battery...... 308 Center High Mounted Stop Light ...... 332 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 313, 333 Keyless Transmitter Replacement Chains, Tire ...... 262 Disposal ...... 315 (RKE) ...... 18 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 290 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .244, 245 Belts, Seat ...... 28, 58 (Malfunction Indicator Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 180 Body Mechanism Lubrication ...... 310 Light) ...... 184 Appearance Care...... 320 Brake Assist System ...... 246 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...... 57 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ....15 Brake Control System, Electronic ...... 245 Checks, Safety...... 57 Auto Down Power Windows ...... 25 390 Child Restraint ...... 42 Points to Remember ...... 315 Driving...... 234 Child Safety Locks...... 24 Pressure Cap ...... 314 Dual Top ...... 109, 112 Child Seat ...... 47 Radiator Cap ...... 314 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 270 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .313, 333 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . .106 Cleaning Corrosion Protection ...... 320 Electrical Power Outlets ...... 106 Wheels ...... 322 Cruise Light ...... 182 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 67 Climate Control ...... 203 Cupholders ...... 108 Electronic Brake Control System ...... 245 Cold Weather Operation ...... 216 Customer Assistance...... 368 Brake Assist System ...... 246 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ...... 203 Electronic Roll Mitigation ...... 249 Compact Spare Tire ...... 258 Data Recorder, Event ...... 41 Traction Control System ...... 246 Compass ...... 186, 189, 193 Defroster, Rear Window ...... 171 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ...... 249 Compass Calibration ...... 189, 194 Defroster, Windshield ...... 58, 206 Electronic Speed Control () . .104 Compass Variance ...... 187, 194 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...... 102 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 249 Computer, Trip/Travel ...... 186, 193 Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 305 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . .186 Connector Diesel Engine Maintenance ...... 353 Electronic Vehicle Information Center UCI...... 198 Diesel Fuel ...... 271 (EVIC) ...... 186, 190 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . .198 Diesel Fuel Requirements ...... 271 Emergency Brake ...... 243 Console ...... 109 Dipsticks Emergency, In Case of Console, Floor ...... 109 Oil (Engine) ...... 306 Brake Warning Light ...... 179 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . .314 Power Steering ...... 242 Jacking ...... 290 Cooling System...... 312 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 299 Jump Starting ...... 294 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 314 Disposal Engine Coolant Capacity ...... 333 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 315 Air Cleaner ...... 308 Coolant Level ...... 315 Door Locks ...... 22 Block Heater ...... 221 Disposal of Used Coolant ...... 315 Door Locks, Automatic ...... 23 Break-In Recommendations ...... 56 Drain, Flush, and Refill ...... 313 Doors ...... 18 Compartment ...... 303, 304 Inspection ...... 312 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt...... 90 Compartment Identification . . . .303, 304 391 Cooling ...... 312 Air Conditioning ...... 208, 309 Additives ...... 271 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 57 Engine Oil ...... 308 Diesel ...... 271 Fails to Start ...... 216 Engine Oil Disposal ...... 308 Ethanol ...... 270 Flooded, Starting ...... 216 Flashers Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...... 272 Fuel Requirements ...... 333 Hazard Warning ...... 288 Gasoline ...... 269 Jump Starting ...... 294 Turn Signal ...... 59, 178, 331, 332 Gauge ...... 178 Oil...... 306, 333 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 216 Octane Rating ...... 269 Oil Change Interval ...... 192, 306 Fluid Capacities ...... 333 Requirements ...... 333 Oil Selection ...... 307, 333 Fluid Leaks ...... 59 Tank Capacity ...... 333 Oil Synthetic ...... 307 Fluid Level Checks ...... 320 Fueling ...... 272 Overheating ...... 288 Engine Oil ...... 306 Fuses ...... 325 Starting ...... 215 Manual Transmission ...... 319 Temperature Gauge ...... 181 Power Steering ...... 242 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . .272, 273, 305 Engine Oil Viscosity ...... 307 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . .334 Gasoline, Clean Air...... 270 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...... 307 Fog Lights ...... 99, 332 Gasoline (Fuel) ...... 269 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .39 Fog Light Service...... 332 Gauges Entry System, Illuminated ...... 16 Fog Lights, Rear ...... 332 Coolant Temperature ...... 181 Ethanol ...... 270 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat ...... 94 Fuel ...... 178 Event Data Recorder ...... 41 Folding Rear Seat ...... 95 Odometer ...... 183 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 57 Folding Windshield ...... 167 Speedometer ...... 178 Exhaust System ...... 57, 311 Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...... 288 Tachometer ...... 180 Exterior Lights ...... 59 Four Wheel Drive...... 230 Gear Ranges ...... 224, 228 Four Wheel Drive Operation...... 230 Gear Select Lever Override ...... 298 Fabric Care ...... 322, 323 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 296 General Information ...... 14, 18 Fabric Top...... 323 Front Axle (Differential) ...... 320 Glass Cleaning ...... 322 Filters Fuel ...... 269 Glow Plug Light...... 186 Air Cleaner ...... 308 Adding ...... 272 Gross Axle Weight Rating ...... 273 392 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...... 273 Hood Release ...... 96 Keyless Entry System ...... 16 Key, Programming ...... 14 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) .....68, 71 Ignition ...... 12 Key, Replacement ...... 14 Hard Top ...... 116 Key...... 12 Keys ...... 12 Hard Top, Modular ...... 116 Ignition Key Removal ...... 12 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...... 13 Hard Top Removal ...... 120 Illuminated Entry ...... 16 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 288 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 13 Lane Change and Turn Signals ...... 178 Headlights Infant Restraint ...... 42, 44 Lane Change Assist ...... 98 Automatic ...... 97 Information Center, Vehicle ...... 190 Lap Belts ...... 28 Bulb Replacement ...... 331 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 66 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 28 High Beam ...... 99 Instrument Cluster ...... 176 Latches ...... 59 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . .99 Instrument Panel and Controls ...... 175 Leaks, Fluid ...... 59 Leveling ...... 100 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...... 323 Leveling, Headlight ...... 100 On With Wipers ...... 98 Integrated Power Module (Fuses)...... 325 Life of Tires ...... 260 Replacing ...... 331 Interior Appearance Care ...... 322 Light Bulbs ...... 59 Switch ...... 97 Interior Lights...... 99 Lights ...... 59, 97 Head Restraints ...... 93 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .....102 Airbag ...... 41, 58, 180 Heated Mirrors ...... 67 Introduction ...... 4 Alarm ...... 181 Heated Seats ...... 92 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control Anti-Lock ...... 180 Heater, Engine Block...... 221 Bluetooth Streaming Audio .....88, 201 Anti-Lock Warning ...... 180 High Beam Indicator ...... 179 Automatic Headlights ...... 97 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Jacking Instructions ...... 291 Back-Up ...... 332 Switch ...... 99 Jack Location ...... 290 Brake Assist Warning ...... 253 Hill Descent Control ...... 254 Jack Operation ...... 290, 291, 292 Brake Warning ...... 179 Hill Descent Control Indicator ...... 254 Jump Starting...... 294 Bulb Replacement ...... 331 Hill Start Assist ...... 246 Cargo ...... 100 Key-In Reminder ...... 13 Center Mounted Stop ...... 332 393 Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . .184 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ...... 181 Lubricant Selection ...... 319 Cruise ...... 182 Service ...... 331 Shift Speeds ...... 228 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Side Marker ...... 332 Master Cylinder (Brakes) ...... 316 Indicator ...... 185, 253 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 181 Methanol ...... 270 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . .186 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .182 Methanol Fuel ...... 270 Exterior ...... 59 Traction Control ...... 185, 253 Mini-Trip Computer ...... 186, 193 Fog...... 99, 332 Turn Signal .....59, 98, 178, 331, 332 Mirrors ...... 66 Glow Plug Light ...... 186 Voltage ...... 178 Automatic Dimming ...... 67 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 288 Warning (Instrument Cluster Electric Powered ...... 67 Headlight Leveling ...... 100 Description) ...... 178 Electric Remote ...... 67 Headlights ...... 331 Locking Axle ...... 233 Heated ...... 67 Headlights On With Wipers ...... 98 Locks ...... 22 Outside ...... 66 Headlight Switch ...... 97 Automatic Door ...... 23 Rearview ...... 66 High Beam ...... 99, 179 Child Protection ...... 24 Vanity ...... 67 High Beam Indicator ...... 179 Door ...... 22 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...... 8 High Beam/Low Beam Select ...... 99 Power Door ...... 22 Modular Hard Top ...... 116 Hill Descent Control Indicator .....254 Steering Wheel ...... 13 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 263 Illuminated Entry ...... 16 Lubrication, Body ...... 310 Mopar Parts...... 305 Instrument Cluster ...... 97 Lug Nuts ...... 289 Multi-Function Control Lever ...... 97 Interior ...... 99 Lights On Reminder ...... 98 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 308 New Vehicle Break-In Period ...... 56 Low Fuel ...... 178 Maintenance Procedures ...... 305 Oil Pressure ...... 179 Maintenance Schedule ...... 338, 353 Occupant Restraints ...... 26 Rear Fog ...... 332 Diesel ...... 353 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...... 269 Rear Servicing ...... 332 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .184 Odometer ...... 183, 186 Rear Tail ...... 332 Manual Transmission...... 228, 319 Trip ...... 182, 183, 186 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 178 Fluid Level Check ...... 319 Oil Change Indicator ...... 184, 192, 354 394 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . .184, 192, 354 Parking Brake...... 243 Recorder, Event Data ...... 41 Oil, Engine ...... 306 Personal Settings...... 197 Recreational Towing ...... 284 Capacity ...... 333 Pets ...... 56 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . .285 Change Interval ...... 192, 306 Pets, Transporting ...... 56 Shifting out of Transfer Case Diesel ...... 307 Phone, Cellular...... 68 Neutral (N) ...... 286 Dipstick ...... 306 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®)...... 68 Refrigerant ...... 309 Disposal ...... 308 Phone (Uconnect®) ...... 71 Release, Hood ...... 96 Filter ...... 308 Power Reminder, Lights On...... 98 Filter Disposal ...... 308 Door Locks ...... 22 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 34 Identification Logo ...... 306 Mirrors ...... 67 Remote Control Materials Added to ...... 308 Steering ...... 242 Door Locks ...... 16 Pressure Warning Light ...... 179 Windows ...... 24 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ...... 16 Recommendation ...... 307, 333 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts...... 35 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . .202 Synthetic ...... 307 Preparation for Jacking ...... 291 Replacement Bulbs ...... 330 Viscosity ...... 307, 333 Pretensioners Replacement Keys...... 14 Oil Filter, Selection ...... 308 Seat Belts ...... 34 Replacement Parts ...... 305 Oil Pressure Light ...... 179 Programmable Electronic Features .....197 Replacement Tires ...... 261 Onboard Diagnostic System...... 305 Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...... 192 Operating Precautions ...... 305 Radial Ply Tires...... 257 Restraint, Head ...... 93 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...... 6 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . .314 Restraints, Child ...... 42 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 66 Radio Operation ...... 203 Restraints, Infant...... 44 Overdrive ...... 227 Radio (Sound Systems) ...... 198 Restraints, Occupant ...... 26 Overdrive OFF Switch ...... 227 Rear Axle (Differential) ...... 320 Rotation, Tires ...... 262 Overheating, Engine ...... 181, 288 Rear Swing Gate ...... 26 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...... 6 Rear Window Defroster ...... 171 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...... 58 Rear Window Features ...... 171 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 59 Paint Care ...... 320 Rear Wiper/Washer ...... 171 Safety, Exhaust Gas...... 57 395 Safety Tips ...... 57 Service Assistance ...... 368 Engine Fails to Start ...... 216 Schedule, Maintenance ...... 338, 353 Settings, Personal ...... 197 Manual Transmission ...... 215 Seat Belt Maintenance...... 323 Shifting ...... 222 Steering Seat Belt Reminder ...... 34 Automatic Transmission ...... 222 Power ...... 242 Seat Belts ...... 28, 58 Manual Transmission ...... 228 Tilt Column ...... 103 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . .32 Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case Wheel Lock ...... 13 And Pregnant Women ...... 35 Neutral (N) ...... 285 Wheel, Tilt ...... 103 Child Restraint ...... 42 Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 202 Front Seat ...... 28 Case Neutral (N) ...... 286 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Inspection ...... 58 Shift Lever Override ...... 298 Controls ...... 202 Pretensioners ...... 34 Shoulder Belts ...... 28 Storage ...... 330 Reminder ...... 178 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ...... 32 Storage, Behind the Seat ...... 109 Untwisting Procedure ...... 32 Side Airbag ...... 39 Storage, Vehicle ...... 208, 330 Seats ...... 89 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . .208 Storing Your Vehicle ...... 330 Adjustment ...... 89 Signals, Turn ...... 59, 98, 178, 331, 332 Stuck, Freeing ...... 296 Easy Entry ...... 90 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...... 262 Sunrider ...... 163, 165 Fold and Tumble Rear ...... 94 Snow Tires ...... 257 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag. . .35 Heated ...... 92 Soft Top ...... 127, 145 Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic ...... 233 Height Adjustment ...... 90 Sound Systems...... 198 Swing Gate, Rear ...... 26 Rear Folding ...... 95 Sound Systems (Radio) ...... 198 Synthetic Engine Oil ...... 307 Removal ...... 94, 95 Spare Tire ...... 258, 259, 291 Seatback Release ...... 90 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 104 Tachometer ...... 180 Tilting ...... 90 Speedometer ...... 178 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . .203 Security Against Theft ...... 15 Starting ...... 215 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . .181 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ...... 15 Automatic Transmission ...... 215 Tilt Steering Column ...... 103 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...... 13 Cold Weather ...... 216 Tip Start ...... 215, 217 Sentry Key Programming ...... 14 Engine Block Heater ...... 221 Tires...... 59, 255 396 Aging (Life of Tires) ...... 260 Towing Eyes ...... 297 Trip Odometer Reset Button...... 182 Air Pressure ...... 255 Traction Control...... 246 Turn Signals ...... 98, 178, 331, 332 Chains ...... 262 Traction Control Light ...... 185 Changing ...... 290 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...... 254 UCI Connector ...... 198 Compact Spare ...... 258 Trailer Towing...... 273 Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) ...... 68 General Information ...... 255 Cooling System Tips ...... 282 Making A Phone Call ...... 74 High Speed ...... 256 Hitches ...... 283 Uconnect® Phone ...... 69 Inflation Pressures ...... 256 Minimum Requirements ...... 278 Universal Child Seat Position Chart .....47 Jacking ...... 290, 292 Trailer and Tongue Weight ...... 277 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Life of Tires ...... 260 Wiring ...... 279 Connector ...... 198 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .263 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 276 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...... 32 Pressure Warning Light ...... 182 Trailer Weight...... 276 Upholstery Care ...... 322 Radial ...... 257 Transaxle Replacement ...... 261 Autostick ...... 227 Vanity Mirrors ...... 67 Rotation ...... 262 Transfer Case ...... 320 Variance, Compass...... 187, 194 Safety ...... 255 Four-Wheel-Drive Operation ...... 230 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...... 8 Snow Tires ...... 257 Maintenance ...... 320 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...... 8 Spare Tire ...... 291 Transmission ...... 317 Vehicle Storage ...... 208, 330 Spinning ...... 259 Automatic ...... 223, 317 Viscosity, Engine Oil ...... 307 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 260 Manual ...... 228 Voice Recognition System (VR) ...... 86 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...... 277 Range Indicator ...... 182 To Open Hood ...... 96 Shifting ...... 222 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Towing ...... 273, 299 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Description) ...... 178 Disabled Vehicle ...... 299 Entry) ...... 18 Warnings and Cautions ...... 8 Guide ...... 276 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 260 Washers, Windshield ...... 311 Recreational ...... 284 Trip Computer ...... 186 Washing Vehicle ...... 321 Weight ...... 276 Trip Odometer ...... 183 Wheel and Wheel Trim...... 322 397 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ...... 322 Wind Buffeting ...... 26 Window Fogging ...... 208 Windows ...... 24 Power ...... 24 Windshield Defroster...... 58, 206 Windshield, Folding ...... 167 Windshield Washers ...... 102, 311 Fluid ...... 311 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 310 Windshield Wipers ...... 102 Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 310 Wiper, Rear ...... 171

398

Chrysler Group LLC

14JK72-126-EE-AA Printed in Europe 14